Home

Solution-16/ Solution-16 Safecom Installation Manual

1. ELECTRONICS Solution 16 DESIGNS Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE 2 22 gly rs o W This page has been included for you to cut out and insert into the spine of the folder ELECTRONICS DESIGN amp MANUFACTURING MA8s0l Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE 2 22 iy Aust qo e 61 2 9672 1777 Solution 16 Solutlon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Copyright 2001 by Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited SYDNEY AUSTRALIA Document Part Number MA8801 Document Issue 2 22 Printed 1 4 2002 This documentation is provided to suit Solut ion 16 Control Panel CC880 LP880 SC8016 Firmware Revision 1 10 2 06 Hardware Revision E M This installation manual includes programming locations to suit both Solution 16 CC880 LP880 and the Solution 16 Safecom SC8016 control panel Locations that are only relevant when using the SC8016 are prefixed with the word Safecom Copyright Notice All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted or stored in a retrieval system in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Trademarks Throughout this document trademark names may have been used Rather than put a trademark symbol in every occurrence of a trademark name w
2. 006 173 Arm Disarm All Areas At Same Time 161 Connecting Codepads 182 Master Codepad Operatons 173 Master Partitioned Codepad Au 172 Master Partitioned Codepad Setup 181 Securite eben DER Eed 173 User Code Allocatons cee eeseceseeeseessseeeeees 180 Zone ATOCAUONS es deeie egerkdegk Oder E et edd iere 178 Patrolman Code 99 PET Alpha Pager IDINUMBGR nennen E 88 Passworde EE 87 Programming amp Hardware Reourementz 85 REPOTUN D einer eege ee degen 85 Reporting Messages eseessesseesesesrseesseessrrssrrerreserese 86 Telecom Access Telephone Noe 85 Phone Controllers cis csscsscessecsgsuasdstesasoes ateses iriri 188 Point ID COGS se enere ean uted aen e a n 74 Power Up Disarmed AN 167 Primary Telephone Number 92 Printer Output BAUD Rate 89 Program Altered Code 119 PrOQraMMINg 00 isecen eeens aa ao 18 Disable Factory Default ee ee ceeeeseeeseeeseees 29 Domestic Format saii siai eina aiite 78 DTMF Command Module 1 0 0 0 cece eeseeeeeeeeseeees 22 Entry Exit Timers nnie EEN EEN 140 EI 24 Hand Held Programmer 20 Installer s Programming Commandes 23 ISSUE222 DOC Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Option BUS eege See ET 22 Be LEE 124 Programming Keynesi a aa e E eh igewntes 21 Telephone Numberg A 92 With Codepad oo eee ioi a R i 19 Programming Ren 24 186 Copy Control Panel Token 25 tagged 26 Programming Mode 34 Programming Sheetg cc ceeeseeeeeesceesceseess
3. 6 10 Seconds 14 120 Seconds 7 is Seconds S200 Seconds 7 15 Seconds 15 200 Seconds Zone Descriptions Use this table as a reference to indicate what each zone is connected to Description Description ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets Location 468 469 Zone Bypass 1 8 Location 470 471 Zone Bypass 9 16 Location 472 473 Zone Trouble 1 8 Location 474 475 Zone Trouble 9 16 Location 476 479 Codepad Duress Location 480 483 Codepad Panic Location 484 487 Access Denied Code Retries Location 488 491 AC Fail Location 492 495 Low Battery Location 496 499 Program Altered Code Location 500 503 V1 10 1 31 Sensor Trouble Sensor Watch Location 500 503 V1 32 Sensor Trouble Sensor Watch Location 504 505 Open Close Location 506 513 Test Reporting Time Location 514 529 Pager Network Password Location 530 539 Pager ID Number Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited N n U D Q oO A U D Q D A 0 D Q D DS 0 D Q D N N Page 8 kar Odette Page 8 ISSUE222 DOC 216 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Location 540 623 Page 125 Output Configurations Location 540 545 Location 546 551 Output 1 foo lo o o Output 2 fofolofojofo Location 552 557 Location 558 563 Location 564 569
4. sssesesssesseessresersesrresesee 93 SOCULICE ene e E Er E EE i 77 127 Naass 173 Sensor Watch fiescnsleecssuecsdessssasssdecedevedsctissesseess 42 108 120 EE AAE eee aechatee hiiteb an betie oe nteeetoceeees eames 142 Serial BEIER deet desea dear eee ees eee 127 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index Logging Events 89 Program Output BAUD Rate 89 Reporting Messages 90 Wiring Dia gram EE 199 Silent EE 107 Siren Allow Resetting From All Areas 0 0 0 157 158 Delay Until Transmission Complete 55 157 158 Operate In STAY Mode 159 ug EIME i hariri teespoed iein 145 SOUNG Rate eieiei eani EE E E cess 146 Sirens Operate In STAY Mode AA 160 Smart Lockemt iiei e n ie coves 154 Software Version Number 28 210 Solution Codepad Mimic Board 189 Solution Relay Output Interface 189 ele EE 210 Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation 198 Status Indicators sccscescecsssssistevessetessessde REESEN srest sess 172 STAY INGi Gator deed ie dgedE eged de eg deed d e ed 32 34 STAY Motel iseiscsevecneensseebdesevsesvenepenstgneredsenneberteess 36 ATMING geed EEN 61 Automatic Arm 157 158 RE et 37 Enable Single Button Arming cece eeseeeeeee 161 Enable Single Button Disarming 0 cece 161 Entry Guard Time seieren naas 141 159 Momentary Inputves cccsscsecsayessecesheesscttnssecceshesetescsines 165 Single Button Arming Disarming cece eee eee
5. 3 Alternate DTMF amp Decadic AUST On nou ot 1 2 K 4 5 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 1400 Hz Ademco TX 1900 Hz 2300 Hz Sescoa TX 1800 Hz Contact ID 4 2 Expressed 4 2 Pulsed 4 2 Pulsed Checksum 4 1 Pulsed Universal Pulse Second Pulses Second Pulses Second 1 1 ao 6 4 1 Pulsed Expanded 7 3 1 Pulsed Universal 8 3 1 Pulsed Expanded 4 5 6 4 5 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 4 ER 6 International DTMF Reversed Decadic Alternate DTMF amp Reversed Decadic No Handshake Required Pager 11 Domestic 12 Basic Pager 13 Reserved 14 PET Alpha Pager 15 Synthesised Voice 20 Pulses Second 20 Pulses Second FDL 40 Pulses Second Location 056 062 Installer Code Location 063 14 Answering Machine Bypass 2 V1 37 15 Answering Machine Bypass 1 e e fsfi asle jefe 9pER I9pEpR 9EEER SEO sfs fsfs o R Locatio O i CH CO Locat m ul O a ore N Locati m oI O ae Ca e gt Locati e ul fe a op CH Locati m oI fe Si Si R Locati e ul a to CH Locatio Ring Count 1 me z SEN GE Answers Location 064 319 User Codes User Code 1 User Code 3 Location 080 087 User Code 4 siise 5 User Code 6 Location 104 111 User Code 7 shb fo fs User Code 9 Location 128 135 User Code 10 Gbsizslslslzla O
6. 8 4 Op Oo STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY Figure 5 CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad Figure 6 CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepad If the control panel has been partitioned you can have a maximum of four areas Each area can have up to a maximum of 8 zones Zones may be shared between areas to act as common zones Zone 16 cannot be allocated to an area and will be indicated when triggered by the AUX indicator on the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad or the FAULT indicator on CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad It would then be recommended to program Zone 16 to operate as a 24 hour zone and common to all areas Master Partitioned Codepad Indicators The indicators on a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad are configured in to four groups Following is a description of what the indicators show 1 Zone Indicators Zone indicators 1 8 display the status of each zone These zones belong to the area that has the AREA DISPLAY indicator illuminated i e If a ZONE indicator is illuminated that zone is unsealed and if the ZONE indicator is not illuminated that zone is sealed 2 Areas On Off Indicators The group of four AREA DISPLAY indicators show the status of each area i e If an indicator is illuminated that area is armed and if the indicator is not illuminated that area is disarmed 3 Area Display Indicators A group of four AREA DISPLAY indicators show what area the zones
7. ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 75 General Reporting Formats The following formats may be designated to report in either Standard of Extended Formats In all cases the standard format will report to the central monitoring station a Subscriber ID Number followed by an Alarm Trouble Restore or Open Close codes The Expanded 3 1 and Expanded 4 1 Formats will report a Subscriber ID Number followed by an Expansion Code followed by a second line where the Expansion Code is repeated as the Subscriber ID Number followed by the Reporting Channel Or User ID relevant to that report If 4 2 Format is selected then no second line is transmitted and the reporting channel number is transmitted directly after the expansion code 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 Event Universal Expanded 4 2 Alarm SSS S A SSS S A SSSS AC pee ee Trouble SSS S T SSS S T SSSS TCh fee moa OS O Bypass SSS S B SSS S B SSSS BCy pes E TI AC Fail SSS S E SSS S E SSSS EAc TT E UE Low Battery SSS S L SSS S L SSSS LL ee ee ee Ed Open SSS S O SSS S O SSSS OU moore 7 Close SSS S C SSS S C SSSS CU cee OS ete TT 3 1 4t 1 3 1 4t 1 Universal Expanded 4 2 Alarm SSSS S R SSS S R SSSS R CH fem SOR Jean LE TrTrTr TR Cu Bypass SSS S Br SSS S Br SSSS Br Cy Pee UR Bae IT AC Fail SSS S Ep SSS S Ep SSSS Ep Acr ee de ies e Low Battery SSS S Lgr SSS S Lgr SSSS Lpr Lg Po cco e e Ta
8. T 2 Power supply select Join 12v with INT for power from PCB or EXT for external 12v power How To Install The BNC Fitting io SOLUTION 16 INTERFACE n 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual Connect to command module s terminal A The connecting pins for lt expander channel output board JPS RECEIVE D2 TRANSMIT Di es M Data transmition LED It indicates the data receiving and transmitting wor Female BNC Star ica oe BNC Base ee Seege Solution Box Rubber washer Diagram showing correct installation of the female BNC Figure 24 BNC Installation Diagram ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 203 How To Mount The Radio Solution PCB See BNC diagram for correct installation DBOBGODWODWOODDOODODDOBOWDHOOOOOE Note The Radio MUST be programmed before securing with double sided tape e Use the double sided tape provided in the resistor pack to secure the radio to the side of the metal box pr Double sided tape Figure 25 Radio Mounting For SC8016 Mounting The Radio Before attempting to mount the radio in the metal cabinet the Radio must be programmed with the correct information such as transmit and receive frequencies transmit power and bandwidth If you are unable
9. The remote connect feature allows you to establish a connection through the telephone network from your IBM or compatible computer to the Solut ion 16 control panel anywhere in the country where a telephone line is present The advantages of this are very obvious and having this facility will allow you to offer faster service to your clients Remote Connect With Customer Control If you wish to configure the control panel so that a remote connection can only be established when the client initiates it through the remote codepad you will need to program the following information LOCATION 032 047 will need to have the Callback Telephone Number programmed and Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 152 will need to be disabled The control panel has now been set so that the client has control for when a remote connection can be established To cause the control panel to dial the remote computer to establish a link hold down the 6 button to two seconds on the remote codepad Remote Connect Without Callback Verification Remote connect without callback verification can be handy where you have a need to perform Upload Download functions from multiple locations It should be noted that by using this feature you are reducing the security of your control panel LOCATION 032 047 should be cleared and Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 152 will need to be enabled The control panel will now allow a connection of the first call without calling the
10. A Duress report Contact ID Event Code 121 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the O button is added to the end of any valid user code being used to disarm the system This alarm will always be silent A duress alarm can be triggered during exit time i e If the system has been armed and then disarmed by adding the O button to the end of the user code before exit time has expired a Duress report will be transmitted Adding D to the end of a user code when arming the system will not cause a duress alarm Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Duress report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 479 with a zero ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 117 Codepad Panic LOCATION 480 483 1201 Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 60 Codepad Panic Locations Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Software Version 1 10 1 36 A Panic Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 120 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when any two outside buttons in the same horizontal row on a codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to LOCATION 666 on page 155 if you require codepad panic to be sil
11. Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 162 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual DTMF Command Module Options LOCATION 671 0 Description Access Into Installer s Programming Mode Access To Installer Code Functions Allowed Disarming amp Auxiliary Code Functions Allowed Master Code Functions Allowed Table 114 DTMF Command Module Options The DTMF Command Module CC886 must be fitted to the COMMAND MODULE socket on the So lut ion 16 printed circuit board to enable access to any of these features via a touch tone telephone Caution must be exercised when using this feature as there is no visual feedback for confirmation Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 for more information 1 Access Into Installer s Programming Mode If this option has been selected access into Installer s Programming Mode will be allowed via any touch tone telephone Programming of any location except for LOCATION 900 may now take place 2 To Installer Code Functions If this option has been selected Installer Code Functions may be performed via any touch tone telephone 4 Disarming amp Auxiliary Code Operations Allowed If this option has been selected the system can be armed and disarmed via any system user code and the operation and use of auxiliary code operations may be performed via any touch tone telephone 8 Master Code Functions Allowed
12. Event Memory Recall Mode enois e eraa aa a a rE rE k rI E esi 55 d Walk Test Mode a a A a E E N 56 5 Toing Outputs Oniand Offen iei eree eriein ak e o eare Ea eS n EEE EEEE E EE e EEEO EO EE Eet 57 6 Setting The Dateand Time eegen cee nie EEN E E ei nial eee S 58 7 Turning Day Alarm On and Off Software Version 1 10 Onlvi eee ee cee cesecssecssecneecseecneeeeeseeeeeeeeeenseeeseenaes 58 RK Setting STAY Mode 2 Zone Si a eseese ar eege Ee Sege ed dE ed agian Mave bop 59 User Code Functions Partitioned Systems Only 60 O Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only 60 Hold Down Functions EECHER EES ENEE EES oe caves ssedaelsoe saysssieousbsees EE EES 61 Arm The System In AWAY Mode 61 E Systemin STAY EN EE 6l O Arm The System In STAY lee gege eet 6l SN Test ehini a a a E A aes Ess canta cancion 61 E iis teamed ice eee Meer eet tetra meee err nee Creare Per tern dren eee ee rere ae an erie rere 62 DMRS o EE 62 4 Turning Day Alarm On and Off New Software Version 1 20 Onwarde 62 Bye paul banal y sts EE 63 6 Innate ASI EE 63 7 E EE 63 8 Codepad ID and Buzzer Tone Change 64 9 7 innate eke Pest E 64 REMOTE OPERATIONS or a A E A Si cagaecethdious E O EE op EE A E E E heed 66 Remote Armims Via Th Telephoneia essnee eiia eae Ee ESES ES peo Ea UENEN Seele 66 How To Remotely Arm Your System Via The Telephone s esseseeseseseeesesreeresresrsserrrssestsserrrsrestentrsrenresrer
13. I TERMI DEFAULT SWITCH Battery Consumption LED When Illuminated Indicates That Power Is Being Drawn From The Battery E DEFAULT S gt LDT Programming Key Or Programmer Plugs In Here 3 Amp Battery Fuse Battery Charge Globe Remains Fully Illuminated 5 Until The Battery Is 100 Charged 3 AMP RELAY CONTACT N 1 AMP 1 Amp Accessory Fuse Ed For External Equipment REMOVE LINK FOR DRY CONTACT PHONE LINE GND WE 12V GND Termination For Phone Line Socket For lt Telecom Lead Connection Z16 215 214 213 Zone Termination Strip Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Output Termination Strip lt Battery Input lt Plug Pack Input EDM TF008 Figure 21 Solution 16 Component Layout With Safecom Interface Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 201 Terminal Definitions and Descriptions Line Fault Module NOTE POLARITY DTMF Command Module NOTE POLARITY Voice Module or Modem Module or Phone Amplifier NOTE POLARITY E DEFAULI Battery Consumption LED When Programming Key or 3 Amp Battery Fuse 1 Amp Accessory Fuse For External Equipment Termination For Phone Line COMMAND LINE FAULT AAMODULEM NODULE 4 OPTIONAL 8ZONE ah EXPANDER 8 CHANNEL gt OUTPUT BOARD PLUGS RO IN HERE S ER K E
14. Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the dialler is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 757 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings Note If Lockout Dialler has been enabled for any zone the last restore signal will not be transmitted until the system or area If partitioned has been disarmed Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 148 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Ring Burst Time LOCATION 846 847 00 Location Description Increments Of 5 ms Increments Of 80 ms Table 99 Ring Burst Time Locations V2 04 These locations program the ring burst time If the duration of the telephone ring tone is 1 5 seconds programming the ring burst time more than the telephone ring duration 1 5 seconds the control panel will not det
15. Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 182 for further information on connecting the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads to the control panel Example If the Area 1 codepad is to be connected to Output 2 you would then set DIP Switch 1 on the back of the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad into the ON position For the Area 1 codepad to communicate to and from the control panel Output 2 will need to be programmed with Output Event Type 6 0 Only Outputs 1 4 on the control panel can be used for these output event types The 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 cannot be used for these output event types Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 134 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Output Polarity Software Version 1 20 There are fifteen different polarities to choose from Each polarity is designated by a number This number needs to be programmed into the appropriate location of the output being used to indicate how the output should operate Polarity i Polarity H OutpurNotUsed ooo d T 1 Normally Open GoingLow LB Normally Low Going Open 2 Normally Open PulsingLow 9 Normally Low Pulsing Open Normally Open One Shot Low Can Reset Normally Low One Shot Open Can Reset pn Normally Open One Show Low Alarm Normally Low One Shot Open Alarm Normally Open Latching Low Normally Low Latching Open Table 70 Event Type Polarit
16. ey EEI On Time Off Time ON Time OFF Time Increments Tolerance 200 ms 19 8 ms 200 ms 1 Sec 99 Sec s Min 99 Min s 1 Hour 99 Hours Table 73 Pulsing Time Settings ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 137 One Shot Polarities The duration or On time of an output is determined by the product of the time base and the multiplier If an output is required to operate for five seconds program the time settings as follows UREE Time Base Multiplier The On time is calculated by multiplying the time base setting 1 second by the multiplier value 05 i e 5x 1 5 seconds On Time Increments Tolerance 200 ms 19 8 Sec s 200 ms 1 Sec 99 Sec 1 Min 99 Min s 1 Hour 99 Hours Table 74 One Shot Time Settings Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 138 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 140 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Event Timers This section covers the features that involve timing Features such as entry and exit times sensor watch time siren run time and system date and time along with a host of other timers are discussed extensively in this section How To Program Entry Exit Times There are two locations to be programmed for Entry Time 1 Entry Time 2
17. i JPS SOLUTION 146 SAFECOM INTERFACE INT 12 EXT JP3 12V GND RECEIVE TRANSMIT TERMI Voice Module or z4 Modem Module or SS SR l Phone Amplifier or zelja Direct Link Cable 4 pe NOTE POLARITY DEFAULT SWITCH D DEFAULT Battery Consumption LED When Illuminated Indicates That Power Is Being Drawn From The Battery LD1 gt Programming Key Or Programmer Plugs In gt Here 3 Amp Battery Fuse eme 1 RELAY CONTACT NX Battery Charge Globe Remains Fully Illuminated X Until The Battery Is 100 Charged 3 AMP 1 AMP 1 Amp Accessory Fuse M For External Equipment D a 3 28e zU REMOVE LINK FOR DRY CONTACT PHONE LINE GND 12V 12V zB ZF 26 25 GND 12V Termination For Phone Line Socket For lt Telecom Lead Connection Z16 215 214 213 Zone Termination Strip PA 211 210 Z9 Output Termination Strip lt Battery Input lt Plug Pack Input EDM TF008 Line Fault Module T NOTE POLARITY LG LINE FAULT LI Voice Module or Modem Module or Phone Amplifier or Direct Link Cable NOTE POLARITY JP2 d 3 AUXILIARY AMODULEA JPS SOLUTION 14 SAFECOM INTERFACE Ci 12V GND RECEIVE TRANSMIT INT AEN EXT e g
18. on page 162 to enable the options required to the used when using the DTMF Command Module The DTMF Command Module also allows domestic dialling to be acknowledged by pressing the button on your telephone New Software Version 1 32 Operation Software From Version 1 10 How To Establish A Communication Link With Your Control Panel Non Partitioned System 1 Dial the telephone number that the control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call a short jingle will be heard 2 After the jingle press the button on your telephone during the pause You will then hear a second jingle You have now established a communication link Operation Software From Version 1 20 How To Establish A Communication Link With Your Control Panel Non Partitioned System 1 Dial the telephone number that the control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call a short jingle will be heard 2 After the jingle press the O button on your telephone during the pause You will then hear a second jingle You have now established a communication link Note If your control panel has been partitioned pressing 0 to establish a communication link will not work Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 68 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual To Establish A Communication Link With Your Control Panel Partitioned System 1 Dial the telephone number that th
19. 4 Single Button Disarming STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 8 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm H Location 671 Page 162 DTMF Command Module Options 1 Access To Installer s Programming Mode Allowed 2 Installer Code Functions Allowed 4 Disarming and Auxiliary Code Operations Allowed 8 Master Code Functions Allowed Location 672 V1 10 Only Page 163 Expansion Board Type 1 Eight Zone Expansion Board 2 Eight Channel Output Board 4 Momentary Keyswitch Input 8 Latching Keyswitch Input Location 672 V1 20 Page 164 Expansion Board Type 1 Eight Zone Expansion Board 7 Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 2 2 Eight Channel Output Board 8 Momentary Disarm 3 Momentary Keyswitch Input 9 Momentary Arm Area 4 4 Latching Keyswitch Input 10 Momentary Disarm Area 4 5 Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode 11 Momentary Arm Disarm Area 4 6 Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 12 Latching Arm Disarm Area 4 Location 673 Page 166 Telephone Line Fault Options 1 Display FAULT Indicator If Telephone Line Fails 2 Sound Alarm When System Is Armed If Telephone Line Fails 4 Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed If Telephone Line Fails Note Options 2 and 4 Must Be Used In Conjunction With Option 1 EG Program a 1 3 or 5 Location 674 675 Page 176 Open Close Code For Area 2 Location 676 677 Page 176 Open Close Code For Area 3 Location 678 679 Open Close Code For Area 4 a Location 680 683 Page 177 Subscriber ID Number For Area 2 fo o
20. 6 AWAY Example If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1996 at 10 00 PM program the date and time as follows MASTER CODE 6 away 0 1 0 1 9 6 2 2 0 0 tr aal Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 144 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Auto Arming Time LOCATION 650 653 0000 Location Description Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit Table 89 Auto Arming Locations This time parameter is used to select the actual time of the day that the system will automatically arm itself in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 This time must be set in 24 hour format i e 10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230 Refer to LOCATION 668 on page 157 and page 158 for selecting whether the control panel should arm in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 If forced arming has been disabled the feature of auto arming will operate regardless of zones being sealed or unsealed If the control panel has been partitioned ALL areas will automatically arm If automatic arming is not required program LOCATION 650 653 with zeros Auto Arming Pre Alert Time LOCATION 654 5 Location Description 654 Increments Of 1 Minute 0 15 Minutes Table 90 Auto Arming Pre Alert Time Locations This is the time period before the control panel will automatically arm itself The codepad will beep once every second until the pre alert timer ha
21. Exit Time For AWAY Mode Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 and Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode The first location of the timer is for programming increments of between 0 15 seconds The second location of the timer is for programming increments of 16 seconds By adding these two locations together will give the total time required Entry Time The Solut ion 16 control panel has four separate Entry Times Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second These will prove to be helpful when the control panel has been partitioned or in any installation that requires more than one Entry Time Entry Time 1 LOCATION 624 625 Defaulted To 10 Seconds Lojo Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Time 1 16 Second Increments For Entry Time 1 Table 75 Entry Time 1 Locations Entry Time 2 LOCATION 626 627 Defaulted To 20 Seconds 41 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Time 2 16 Second Increments For Entry Time 2 Table 76 Entry Time 2 Locations Entry Time 3 LOCATION 628 629 Defaulted To 30 Seconds 1 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Time 3 16 Second Increments For Entry Time 3 Table 77 Entry Time 3 Locations Entry Time 4 LOCATION 630 631 Defaulted To 40 Seconds 82 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Time 4 16 Second Increments For Entry Time 4 Table 78 Entry Time 4 Locations ISSUE22
22. G 5 DEFAULT RELAY SWITCH CONTACT Y GND D COM 127 a Bg E ks Wo gt oy GO ira Solutian 76 Line Fault Module NOTE POLARITY Socket For lt Telecom Lead Connection DTMF Command Module NOTE POLARITY 2V H12V z8 216 Voice Module or z7 216 Modem Module or Phone Amplifier gl E NOTE POLARITY Z5 1273 SE l ermination GND Strip HIN Z4 212 Z3 271 Z2 1210 Z1 129 PE Battery Consumption LED When Programming Key or Output Termination Strip 3 Amp Battery Fuse 1 Amp Accessory Fuse GE Geck For External Equipment attery Input lt Plug Pack Input EDM TFO08 LD1 DEFAULI Si COMMAND LINE FAULT MODUL A i ODULE dh ARY AUXILI MODULE Termination For Phone Line OPTIONAL 8 ZONE EXPANDER 8 CHANNEL OUTPUT BOARD PLUGS IN HERE REMOVE LINK FOR DRY CONTACT Soiutbiaon 7G LI PHONE LNE Socket For lt Telecom Lead Connection 216 215 214 243 Zone Termination Strip Z12 Zt zZfo z9 Output Termination Strip lt Plug Pack Input EDM TF 008 Solution 16 Component Layout Figure 22 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 202 Solution 16 Safecom Interface Solut Pins for radio The connecting pins for Se expander channel Ss output board SAFECOM INT 4 12V EXT JP3 7 4
23. LOCATION 495 with a zero Program Altered Code LOCATION 496 499 3060 Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 497 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format no Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 64 Program Altered Code A Panel Program Altered report Contact ID Event Code 306 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when data in one or more locations has been altered in the Installer s Programming Mode The transmission will report once Installer s Programming Mode has been terminated Changes made via the Master Code functions do not cause the Panel Program Altered report to be transmitted Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Panel Program Altered report is not required program the dialler channel in LOCATION 499 with a zero Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 120 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual LOCATION 500 503 3071 Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 65 Sensor Watch Code Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or A Self Test Failure report Contact ID Event C
24. N X a DI ul 1 1 1 1 oo N N N oo O CA N oo o LS EE EI B EI LS O Si N CA N e ul N o oa h oa oO Lel D N 3 oO Y CH m ul Lel D Ca CH wo L J Le E LE E Lei Lele Le Let Le L Le D User Code 32 also reports when any of the following methods for arming and disarming are used 1 Arm and disarm via Remote Radio Control equipment connected to the JP5 pins or the optional Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 2 Arm and disarm the system via Alarm Link Software CC8 16 3 Arm and disarm the system remotely over the telephone 4 Single button arming in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 5 Single button disarming from STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 6 Automatic arming in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Access Codes 101 Auxiliary Codes Auxiliary Codes can be used to operate programmable outputs Refer to Output Event Types 2 12 and 2 13 on page 131 for further information Auxiliary Codes can be any length from one to seven digits long Any unused location should be programmed with the value 15 The priority level Which is the last location of each Auxiliary Code controls the behaviour of the code allowing the code to operate when the system is armed or disarmed etc Refer to Table 47 Auxiliary Code Priority Levels below for the available options Auxiliary Code 1 LOCATION 320
25. Output 3 Strobe DD Relay bein lala Location 570 575 Location 576 581 Location 582 587 wat bblsllll wen Te sf feo wen Pill Location 588 593 Location 594 599 Location 600 605 ver EE sen PE FEI zen EEEEER Location 606 611 Location 612 617 Location 618 623 oman Tafea sfo omer Elle ae Location 624 6250 Page 140 d Location 624 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Entry Time 1 Location 625 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location NENNEN age Entry Time 2 Location 626 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Location 627 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 628 629 Entry Time 3 Location 628 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Location 629 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 630 631 0 Pageta Entry Time 4 Location 630 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Location 631 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location en 639 Pae Exit Time For AWAY Mode Location 632 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Location 633 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 634 635 EE it Ti Location 634 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 Location 635 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location eng 637 Pe Exit Time For STAY Mode 2 Location 636 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Location 637 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 6388 639 ES Pe Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode Location 638 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec
26. Remote Connect With Callback Verification 70 Remote Connect With Customer Control 70 Remote Connect Without Callback Verification 70 Terminate On Alarm 152 User Code Function Arm Disarm All Areas At Same Time 60 USER WEE 98 EE 51 ISSUE222 DOC 228 AMOCAtlONS geed EEN 180 AUXINALY EE 52 101 KEE 52 Priority Level vic tesneni ee ENEE Ee eae 99 V Voice Mod E a E E ERa 186 Connection os mirra EE EE ORT EGE Ras 83 Operation otisses ieor i E EE E i EREE 82 Recording Message ccesssececssececeessececeesseeeeeeeneees 82 Replaying Mesange 82 Ww Walk TeSt rrn reenn aan hs ddccevecsicecncedeests 48 56 Warranty Statement 0 eee eeeeeeceeecnseeseenee 210 Wiring Diagram 33sccccviscessessntevenensecoessteevagoeeseedans 196 Z Zone AW OCALIONS vesecacevccsdhinetivcocnien AE ENEEgege e deed ise 178 Bypass Report eech ees eege 114 Defaults neue ee E eai 104 Dialler Channel 104 EOL Resistor Nalue 112 EVEt EE 104 Ti cator EE 34 TndiGators egen eege eege desse 32 172 Operating Information eee eee ceeeeecseeeeeees 104 Be EE 104 BDO De EE 107 Programming 02 arean a aee a ARETE EEE ai ia 104 ISSUE222 DOC Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Pulse Comte ite EEN NENNEN 104 108 Pulse Count Handover eneoeoe00000r0r000101010101e 109 156 Pulse Count Time cccceesseeseseseseseseserererenes 104 109 Reporting Information cece
27. Sensor Watch sescccaeieastecesesececeseacascersdececeneabaeateeds 120 element ee Rtas sees 121 TL OS AE eeh detach cudededsnncestceus E E E ETEN 122 Zone Bypass Report 114 ZONE Trouble ee NEEN ENEE EEN 115 T Te ME 121 Telecom Connection Diagrams eseeeseesseseesereeereeeee 204 Tele permit Notre iraani a Ea ais 16 Telephone Anti Jamming ceeecceeeeeeseeeceteeeeneeees 206 Telephone Line Fail inisi eee eceesseceesseeeceeseeeeeeseeeerens 43 Activate Alarm When Armed cscseseseseseeeeeees 166 Activate Alarm When Disarmed ononoooeoooo0e0e00000e 166 Operate FAULT T Indieator ee eeseeeeeeeceeenseeeeeens 166 Telephone Line Fault Module 0 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeereeeneeees 187 Telephone Monitor Mode 49 Terminal Definitions and Descriptions s sseses1 194 Termination Block For JP5 Pins CCRN 187 Test Programming Key reann nrin iii iiia 24 Test Kenortgs geiergert a AE 122 Tinitiate si eee ce hee tech bes eden dee 64 On All Active Diallers Partitioning eee 122 Only When Armel 122 207 Send After Siren Reset we a cic e eege Se 167 Set First Test Report 46 FROU Plug Pak oniinn ieoi AEN 188 MAME WE 145 Timed Output Pre Alert Time 0 eee 145 Transmission Format 94 Transmission Speed 95 Trouble Reportg zeg ZE sAgdte egt EEGEN 115 U Upload Download Call Back Telephone Number 93 DirectConnect Shida niin Laake 69 Enables 20 ENEE ENEE ENNEN 152 Remote Connect 70
28. State Access Number 02 9 281 9255 VIC TAS 0395104451 07 3 891 6824 08 231 1493 09 321 3528 ee ee Table 33 Telecom Access Telephone Numbers Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 86 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual PET Alpha Pager Messages This transmission format is the most informative method of reporting alarm activity to the end user When using the PET Alpha Pager Format the control panel will transmit all alarm information using English language messages Once the alarm message has been received on the pager appropriate action can be taken The following table lists the events that will cause the control panel to transmit to the PET Alpha Pager and the messages that will be displayed on the pager ISSUE222 DOC Event At Panel AC Fail AC Restore Area Has Been Armed Area Has Been Disarmed Burglary Zone Has Triggered Burglary Zone Has Restored Burglary Zone Has Triggered Area Burglary Zone Has Restored Area Codepad Tamper Code Retries Exceeded Data Programming Change System Has Been Armed System Has Been Disarmed Codepad Duress Low Battery Low Battery Restored Codepad Panic Alarm Codepad Fire Alarm V1 37 Codepad Medical Alarm V1 37 RF Jamming V2 00 RF Fail V2 00 Telco Fail V2 00 Test Report Zone Automatically Isolated When Armed Disarming When Zones Have Been Isolated Zone Unsealed At End Of Exit Time Zone Has Resealed After End Of
29. The control panel will no longer display the FAULT indicator or beep the codepad once every minute when the system fails to communicate via the safecom network AC Mains Failure An AC mains failure will flash the MAINS indicator sound the codepad buzzer once every minute and an AC Fail report will be transmitted to the monitoring station This fault will clear after the AC mains has been restored An AC Restore report will be transmitted once the AC mains has been restored for more than two minutes If you require the MAINS indicator to flash and an AC Fail report to be transmitted after one hour enable Option 4 in LOCATION 667 on page 156 If you wish only to transmit an AC Fail report and ignore the mains failure on the codepad V1 30 enable Option 4 in LOCATION 668 on page 158 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 44 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 46 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Functions This section deals with the more advanced features that are required for testing and regular maintenance of the system Features such as Installer Code Functions Master Code Functions and Hold Down Functions are covered in this section Installer Code Functions Installer Code Functions are designed to allow the installer to perform various system tests without
30. Using a Master Code set the date and time Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information on setting the date and time Zone Number Zone Type Geer 2 3 4 5 6789 16 Elie Table 1 Zone Defaults The factory default settings allow the control panel to communicate in Contact ID Format operating eight zones For further information on the factory default settings refer to the Programming Sheets on page 211 at the back of the installation manual If sixteen zones are required refer to LOCATION 339 on page 112 for setting the split EOL resistor value or LOCATION 672 to enable the zone expansion board if required on page 163 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 16 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Telepermit Note The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions This equipment shall not be used in any manner that could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged and arrange for its disposal or repair The preferred method of dialling is to use DTMF tones as this is faster than pulse Decadic dialling In some situations there may be difficulties with DTMF signalling as this control panel is not fully compatible with the Telecom Telephone Network In this case you must
31. followed by the button Er Ze J Fa E Now enter command 9 6 O followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode The exit time for AWAY Mode has now been programmed for 26 seconds To terminate the communication link with the control panel press the button twice Programming Option Bits When programming these locations you will notice that there are four alternatives per location You may select one two three or all of these alternatives for each location however only one number is required to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Example If at LOCATION 663 you want options 1 2 and 4 Add the numbers together and the total is the number to be programmed In this example the number to be programmed is 7 i e 1 2 4 7 Option Description Enable Dialler Reporting Functions Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone O Enable Upload Download pg Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm Table 3 Example Programming Option Bits ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Installers Programming Commands 23 There are several commands that can be invoked to perform various functions once the Installer s Programming Mode has been entered To invoke the command enter the corresponding numerical code followed by the Command Function AWAY button 958 Enable and Disable Zone Status Mode 959 Test Programm
32. s Location 639 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location 640 6440 ee e Codepad Lockout Time Location 640 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Location 641 Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Location EEGENEN ae Sensor Watch Time Location 642 Increments Of Days Tens Digit Location 643 Increments Of Days Units Digit Location 644 649 V110 Oe Seen System Date Location 644 Day Of The Week Sun 1 Sat 7 Location 645 Month Of The Year Jan 1 Dec 12 Location 646 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Location 647 Day Of The Month Units Digit Location 648 Current Year Tens Digit fa fafofifo s Location 649 Current Year Units Digit Location 644 649 V1 20 00 EEE Page 143 System Date Location 644 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Location 645 Day Of The Month Units Digit Location 646 Month Of The Year Tens Digit Location 647 Month Of The Year Units Digit Location 648 Current Year Tens Digit DHDHDD Location 649 Current Year Units Digit ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets Location 650 653 Auto Arming Time Location 654 Auto Arming Pre Alert Time Location 655 Timed Output Pre Alert Time Location 656 659 Auto Operation Of Timed Output Location 660 Siren Run Time Location 660 V2 04 Siren Run Time Location 661 Location 650 Location 651 Location 652 Location 653 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute
33. seconds This can only occur if the Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 has been connected to the Line Fault Module socket on the printed circuit board and Option 1 in LOCATION 673 on page 166 has been enabled The fault will clear once the telephone line has been reconnected for more than 40 seconds 6 H Fault An E2 fault will register when the control panel detects an internal checksum error The control panel will need to be powered down and defaulted to clear this fault 7 Zone 16 In Alarm Partitioned Systems Only When the control panel has been partitioned Zone 16 cannot be allocated to an area When Zone 16 has triggered the zone will register as a system fault on any CPS Area Addressable CP500A codepad If a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad has been used the AUX indicator will illuminate 8 Communication Failure A communication failure fault will register if the control panel was unsuccessful in calling the receiving party after the control panel has exhausted its maximum number of attempts V2 00 Press the 8 button again to determine communication method has failed Zone 1 On Board Daller Zone Safecom network Note If the control panel is not connected to the telephone line and no Primary Telephone Number or Secondary Telephone Numbers have been programmed the control panel will still register this fault if Option 1 in LOCATION 663 is enabled and a communication dialler hybrid is fitted V2 03
34. 1 37 For Solut ion 16 control panels with software version 1 10 1 37 refer to Swinger Shutdown Count in LOCATION 662 on page 146 to set the number of times the siren and or dialler will activate before lockout will take effect Software Version 1 40 For Solut ion 16 control panels with software version 1 40 refer to LOCATION 662 on page 147 to set the number of times the siren will be allowed to activate before it will be locked out and LOCATION 757 on page 147 to set the number of times the dialler will activate before lockout will take effect 4 Silent Alarm A zone programmed to be silent will not trigger the HORN SPEAKER RELAY STROBE or EDMSAT outputs The dialler and all other programmable outputs will function as per their particular programming Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 108 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Sensor Watch Sensor watch gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may have stopped working This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed time period Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 for programming Sensor Watch Time This value determines how many 24 hour periods a zone may remain continuously sealed before it registers as a Sensor Watch fault The number of hours required to fulfil these 24 hour periods is only calculated while the system is in the disarmed state Ever
35. 20 0 Description Delay Audible Alarm Until Communication Complete Reset Alarm Outputs From Any Area Partitioned Systems Only Ignore AC Mains Fail V1 30 Auto Arming In STAY Mode 1 Table 109 System Options 4 Software Version 1 20 1 Delay Audible Alarm Until Communication Complete If this option has been enabled the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will not activate until the base station receiver has sent a Kiss Off back to the control panel after the message has been transmitted If multiple messages are transmitted the sirens will activate after the last Kiss Off has been sent If the transmission back to the base station was unsuccessful and a Kiss Off was not received the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will activate after the third call attempt 24 hour alarms are not effected by this option The sirens will always activate immediately upon a 24 hour alarm 2 Reset Alarm Outputs From Any Area Partitioned Systems Only This option is only applicable when the control panel has been partitioned If this option has been enabled any valid user code from any area will be able to stop the horn speaker strobe bell and EDMSAT outputs from operating This option does not allow a user code allocated from one area to disarm another area 4 Ignore AC Mains Fail V1 30 If this option has been enabled the MAINS indicator will not flash nor will the codepad beep once every minute whe
36. 27 Location 754 User Code 31 Refer to User Codes on page 98 for further programming information of the actual codes Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Location 727_ User Code 4 H Location 731 User Code 8 H Location 735 User Code 12 Location 739 User Code 16 Location 743 User Code 20 Location 747 User Code 24 Location 751 User Code 28 Location 755 User Code 32 Partitioning 181 Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning To connect area addressable codepads to a system that has been partitioned a few steps will need to be taken for the codepads to operate correctly Setting Up The Master Partitioned Codepad As The Main Codepad If you are using the CP5 Master Partitioned CPSO0P codepad as the main codepad of the partitioned system you will need to connect the codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V CLK and DATA All three DIP Switches need to be set to the ON position Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad As The Main Codepad If you are not using a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad of the partitioned system you will need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V CLK and DATA In addition to setting up the Area 1 codepad you will need to set the DIP switch 1 on the back of the codepad into the ON position and enable Option 1 in LOCATION 667 on page 156 Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad If you wish
37. 61 STAY Mode 2 AMME oe E e KEES NEA NEE 38 61 LIRE 39 Enable Single Button Arming 1 0 0 0 eee eee eee 161 Enable Single Button Disarming 0 eee eee 161 Entry Guard Time ee eee eseceeseeenseeeeeees 141 159 Momentary Input 165 Programming Zones 59 Single Button Arm Disarm cece eeseeeeeeeeseeeees 61 Strobe EE 62 Subscriber ID Number 96 Ave ESEESE 177 TE iergendee 177 ATC E 177 ATCA 4 oi hte Be each Sect esb enters Retesal sab cede Seventeen 177 Swinger Shutdown Dialer 0 cake teii ee idl ahah 147 ITEMS EE 147 SIKEN ADIAM ERs EE E EEEE EST 146 Synthesised Voice Disable Via Master Code ceeeesscesseeesseeeseeeseeees 81 Synthesised Voice Reporting TE 81 OPCLAllON eseu aaen 81 Set Up and Programming Numbers eee 80 System Operations Arming In AWAY Mode 35 Arming In STAY Mode 1 36 Arming In STAY Mode 7 38 RE E 35 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 37 Disarming From STAY Mode 2 39 System Options 1 154 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 227 System Options Zosen ei ereen a e 155 System Options 3 156 System Options Aeee i e E 157 158 System OPUONS EE 167 System Options o 168 System Status Reports eg KEE 118 Access Denied eet EEN EENEG ee ee E 118 Duress Ee EE 116 LOW Battery EEN 119 Open Close Reports cecscesseeeseceseeeeseeceseeenees 120 Panic Alarm 8 117 Programming Change 119 RE UE 121 RE Jammin ge sees ante coluceesnecesenevbe cousntecet doses 121
38. 69 Horn Speaker Beeps for the identification beeps and their meanings No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 69 Horn Speaker Beeps Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 130 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual 1 15 Sirens Running This output will operate for the duration of the siren run time programmed in LOCATION 660 on page 145 When the sirens have been activated this output will reset once the siren run time has expired 2 0 Strobe Operating This output will operate when an alarm condition occurs and will reset once a valid user code has been entered or when the system is next armed or disarmed 2 1 Silent Alarm This output will operate whenever a zone programmed as silent has triggered The output will reset when the siren run time expires an audible alarm has triggered or a valid user code has been entered 2 2 Alarm When In STAY Mode This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset when the system has been disarmed A 3 Alarm When In AWAY Mode This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode The output will reset when the system has been disarmed 2 5 5 Fire Alarm Resetting This output will o
39. A Delay 3 Zone A Delay 3 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Time 3 on page 140 5 Delay 4 Zone A Delay 4 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Time 4 on page 140 6 Instant Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as an Instant zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 7 Handover Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Handover zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 8 Delay 1 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 1 zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 106 10 11 12 13 14 15 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Delay 2 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 2 zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 Delay 3 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 3 zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 Delay 4 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 4 zone
40. Ademco 10 PPS 1400 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 20 PPS 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 40 PPS 1400 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 DTMF Hi Low HS Expanded Format 4 2 Express 10 PPS 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 20 PPS 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 40 PPS 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 DTMF 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz or Hi Low 4 2 or 4 2 CS DTMF Hi Low HS Expanded Format Table 46 Receivers and Their Formats If your base station receiver type is not listed above do not despair there are many combinations of formats speeds and handshake tones Try a few combinations and you will more than likely find the one that works for your receiver It should be noted that some formats offer much more detailed information than others so take the time to consider the many alternatives being offered Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 96 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Subscriber ID Number LOCATION 052 055 0000 This number is transmitted to identify the calling control panel Enter the desired Subscriber ID Number in the four locations provided For Basic Pager Format LOCATION 052 is ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID Number required must start in LOCATION 053 When using Domestic Dialling Format the number of identification beeps will be the number that is programmed in LOCATION 055 This gives the ability to identify between 15
41. CODE AWAY Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 36 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 1 is when the system has been armed with particular zones automatically isolated These zones can only be programmed by the installer When there is a need to arm only the system perimeter this mode is extremely handy It automatically disables the interior detection zones for allowing movement within the protected area while at the same time arming the perimeter zones There are two methods for arming your system in STAY Mode 1 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and needs to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 161 Note Single button arming in STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 32 Method One How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 1 Enter your cone followed by the LSTAYJ button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will illuminate Exit time for STAY Mode 1 will now commence Any zones that have been programmed for STAY Mode 1 will be automatically isolated and their respective indicators will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the ZONE indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep CODE STAY Method Two How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 1 Hold down the sm button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will illum
42. DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 124 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Programmable Outputs The Solut ion 16 control panel has six fully programmable outputs on the main PCB and an option of adding an extra eight outputs via the 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 The 8 Channel Output Expansion Board connects onto the pins marked JP5 and JP6 on the control panel and must be enabled in LOCATION 672 on page 163 Programmable outputs require four parameters to be programmed in order to operate correctly Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier When To Operate How To Operate How Long To Operate For How Often To Operate For ISSUE222 DOC When To Operate How To Operate How Long To Operate For How Often To Operate GA 3 E E Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier Is selected from the Output Event Types listed on page 127 Each digit should be entered into the two corresponding locations for the output event type required Is selected from the Table 70 Event Type Polarities For Software Version 1 20 on page 134 or Table 71 Event Type Polarities Only For Software Version 1 10 on page 135 This determines whether the output remains operating for the duration of the event pulses for the duration operates once only one shot or latches on Is determined by a time base and a multiplier Refer to Timing on page 136 for fu
43. Digit Event Qualifier Which Gives Event Code Group Number Point ID Number Subscriber ID Specific Event Information Made Up Of 3 Made Up Of 2 Made Up Of 3 Number 1 New Event Or Opening Hex Digits Hex Digits Hex Digits 3 New Restore Or Closing Table 26 Contact ID Format Breakdown In general Contact ID reporting format is very simple as most of the Event Codes and Point ID Codes have been predefined The Event Code is programmable whereas the Point ID Codes are fixed The base station software usually only has the ability to identify a zone going into alarm by its Point ID Code and usually pays little attention to the Event Code Refer to Table 28 Point ID Codes on page 74 for further information on the Solution 16 Point ID Codes and Table 27 Contact ID Event Codes on page 73 for the list of Event Codes that are supported by the control panel ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 73 Event Codes Event Description Event Description Event Description Water Flow 157 Bottled Gas Low Comms Trouble 142 Polling Loop Shore Sounder Relay Troubles II i43 Exp n Module Fail 320 SounderReay SS Sensor Tamper s21 Jeen JO O o Exp Module Tamper 322 Bel2 O oo T a Trouble Relay Co a a Reversing Jl DEE EEN Table 27 Contact ID Event Codes EES E E Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 74 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 S
44. EE S S 23 Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status Mode 23 Command 959 Test Programming Key 24 Command 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 24 Command 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Senge 24 Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key 25 Command 963 Copy From Programming Key To Control Dance 25 Command 964 Erase Programming Key 26 Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format 27 Command 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 0 cee eeceeeceesceseceseceseceaecsaecsaecaeesaeeeneeees 28 Command 999 Display Software Version Number 28 Disable Factory Defaults ue estrr sity ENER chek svecev suse cg cay ede Udeasasdv sien EEE a EEEE EE ESEESE s ob r E TES EEEE rer 29 DEFAULTING THE CONTROL PANEL eiis td dech e a a e Sp gavcouastansasedgubcuseg es pigecoesteest EE E OEE ENE 29 SYSTEM INDICATORS AND OPERATIONS sssesesoeseseseseesesccoesoroesesereceesosorsesesoecesosorsesesosoesesesesee Al SYSTEM INDICATORS AND ORERATIONS cenene e A A deed A N S ER 32 Phe e DEE 32 ZONE eet EE 32 AWAY Indicatie ctsspsageiig EERSTEN ages tates ates r EESO E ESES ETE TEET E R eed ects 32 STAY re 32 MAINS Indicator ue EE Ee EE EE EE he aa eevee Ate bats 33 FAULT Andicatotin discs daisgatie ie aa ae ee ie eis Bele eis ee aes eee ei es Boies 33 Auidible Indicators 0 3 c scececsbs sssssees Eege ERENNERT AEN 33 ECD CODEPAD INDICATORS reueg eege det ee Read en eee teaver 34 SYSTEM OPERATIO
45. EEE iaai 42 Fault Descriptions asenn E EE EENS CAE EENEG EEN 42 Lo LOW Battery EE 42 Ze Date an RE 42 3 gt Sensor Wate asics e ial esa esse arti dase ha AA ne a A i ati aati held AE 42 4 Horm Speaker Monitors ENEE Bee he ts Ets Dae 43 5 Telephone Line PAN rrea rarere e araea raaro aea raara a rp aa dh a E oE Era SETS EEEE SOPE Eio EORR RESSE 43 D PR Faltin or eae en n e e To e Ea au ea eo E e e AEE Eed tere Sege d e EE 43 7 Zone 16 In Alarm Partitioned Systems Only 0 eee eee eeceseceseceeesecesecesecsaecsaecseecaeecseseaeseeeeaeeeeenseenseenaes 43 R Communication Failure ises e eEENe SEENEN EEN oE Eden 43 AC Mains alte eeneg Nee eiior a EREECHEN EES ENEE EES oes 43 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS EN 46 Installer Code FUNCIONS eenn e a See E S de Malone Ea NES E ES 46 2 Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report 46 3 Event Memory Recall Mode icsc cess cuneate iain eaten TA en eo etal 47 d Walk Test Modes ensinei rerea Ee steeds deusibees EE EES E EE EEES 48 Xo Satellite Siren Service Modein anann E E EE a E R test e Abee Beete eeneg 48 7 Telephone Monitor Mode On and Off AA 49 Master Code F ntonS eeen e n E eet A a he eee nbs EE EE a ae 50 U Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only 50 L Changing and Deleting User Codes iieii erpe an Sues ie eor ane e ven EES EEE HEESE Era ESE SEEE ia S 51 Auxiliary Codes EE 52 2 Programming Domestic Phone Numbers AAA 54 3
46. Exit Time 24 Hour Zone Triggered 24 Hour Zone Restored 24 Hour Fire Zone Triggered 24 Hour Fire Zone Restored Pager Message Close Area User Table 34 Alpha Pager Messages The symbol represents the zone number or user code number in the transmission Subscriber ID Number The following example shows how a single transmission will be received on the PET Alpha Pager A similar message to the one below will be seen when user 1 has armed the system User UI CLOSE USER Table 35 Example Of PET Alpha Pager Transmission Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 87 LOCATION 514 529 706173737764 00 00 A provision has been made in the PET protocol for a mandatory six digit ASCII character password to be transmitted before the alarm message is transmitted However at the time of writing this manual neither Telecom nor Hutchinson is making full use of this feature There is however an important difference in what both organisations expect to see as the password for all pagers at the present time Telecom expects to see the password passwd sent before the message is transmitted The password is programmed using ASCII text Example To communicate with Telecom program 70 61 73 73 77 64 as the password ASCII Characters ASCII Character ACSII Character ASCII Character Lal Ww La ll aD el ET E E EE EE g La IEM i d wj LD qj re i i N
47. LOCATION 664 on page 153 has the option First To Open Last To Close Reporting programmed only a closing report for the last area will be reported If the user disarms all areas at the same time and LOCATION 664 on page 153 has the option First To Open Last To Close Reporting programmed only an opening report for the first area will be reported Note V2 04 If an area has a zone unsealed when attempting to arm all areas at the same time the codepad will sound one long beep if forced arming is disabled and prevent you arming all areas until all zones are sealed normal and or isolated 2 Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 amp STAY Mode 2 If this option has been selected the hold down functions for arming in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 will be functional Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 for more information 4 Single Button Disarming STAY Mode 1 amp STAY Mode 2 This option will only operate when Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 has been enabled This option will enable hold down functions for disarming from STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 for more information 8 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm This option allows the memory of alarm events to be cleared from the remote codepad when the system has been disarmed If this option has not been enabled the system will need to be armed and disarmed again to clear alarm memory from the remote codepad
48. Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 654 Increments Of Minutes 0 15 Location 655 Increments Of Minutes 0 15 Location 656 Location 657 Location 658 Location 659 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Hour Of The Day Units Digit Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location 660 Increments Of Minutes 0 15 Siren Sound Rate Slow lt Sound gt Fast Location 662 V1 10 1 37 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren and Dialler Location 662 V1 40 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Location 663 Dialler Options 1 Location 664 Dialler Options 2 Location 665 System Options 1 Location 666 System Options 2 Location 667 System Options 3 Location 668 V1 10 Only System Options 4 Location 668 V1 20 System Options 4 1 Dialler Reporting Functions Allowed 2 Remote Arming Via The Telephone 4 Upload Download Via Alarm Link 8 Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm 1 Open Close Reports Only After Alarm 2 First To Open Last To Close Reporting Partitioned Systems Only 4 Open Close Reports In STAY Mode Allowed 8 Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed V1 31 1 Forced Arming Allowed 2 EDM Smart Lockout 4 Horn Speaker Monitor 8 Horn Speaker Beeps Allowed 1 Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed 2 Handover Delay To Be Sequential 4 Codepad Panic To Be Silent 8 Access Denied C
49. STAY Mode 2 this option will need to be enabled 8 Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed V1 31 This option needs to be enabled if the answering machine bypass feature is required to operate only when the system has been armed When the system is disarmed the control panel will not answer any incoming calls This option is beneficial in high telephone traffic installations where the control panel could answer an incoming call Refer to LOCATION 063 on page 96 to enable answering machine bypass Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 154 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Options 1 LOCATION 665 1 Description Forced Arming Allowed EDM Smart Lockout Allowed Horn Speaker Monitor Horn Speaker Beeps Allowed Table 104 System Options 1 1 Forced Arming Allowed If this option has been selected the system can be armed with zones unsealed If this option is not selected all zones must be sealed before the system can be armed An attempt to arm the system with forced arming not enabled will clear any alarm memories present but arming will not be permitted This feature will be ignored if the system has been set for auto arming in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode or has been remotely armed via the telephone using a Phone Controller CC911 DTMF commands via the DTMF Command Module CC886 or remote operation via the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 2 EDM Smart Lockou
50. Software 1 10 1 36 This output will operate when a codepad panic alarm audible or silent has been initiated by pressing the 1 ana 3 buttons the 4 and 6 buttons the 7 and 9 buttons or the LSTAYJ and LAWAY buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Codepad Panic Alarm Software 1 37 Onwards This output will operate when a codepad panic alarm audible or silent has been initiated by pressing the 1 aa3 buttons or the LSTAYJ and LAWAY buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad Codepad Duress Alarm This output will operate when a duress alarm has been initiated by adding a D to the end of the user code being used to disarm the system The output will reset the next time the system has been armed Codepad Tamper This output will operate when the wrong code has been entered more times than allowed Refer to LOCATION 338 on page 101 for setting the number of incorrect attempts that may be allowed This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Speaker Beeps New Software Version 1 37 This output will function during all remote radio keyswitch operations allowing you to fit a 12V DC buzzer or light to provide status indication for the end user Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 is not required to be enabled for this event type to operate Refer to Table
51. The output will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity 9 Normally Low Pulsing Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to pulsing open circuit when the event occurs It will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored Time parameters vary the On time of the pulse 10 Normally Low One Shot Open This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the time parameter has expired This one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset 11 Normally Low One Shot Open With Retrigger This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs Every time the event occurs it will restart the one shot timer The output will switch back to zero volts once the one shot time has expired 12 Normally Low One Shot Open With Reset This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired or when the event has returned to normal This means the one shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time setting 13 Normally Low One Shot Open With Alarm This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switc
52. The two JP5 pins do not have access to this feature When using the Night Arm Station CP105 to arm in STAY Mode 1 if this option has been enabled three horn speaker beeps will be heard to indicate that the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 When using RE005 the transmitters must be programmed for single button Arm Disarm if Speaker beeps are required ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 155 System Options 2 LOCATION 666 2 Description Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or REOOS Installed Handover Delay To Be Sequential Codepad Panic To Be Silent Access Denied Codepad Tamper To Be Silent Table 106 System Options 2 1 Keyswitch Interface Night Arm Station Or RE005 Installed This option must be selected when using the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 Night Arm Station CP105 or the 2 Channel Radio Interface RE005 This option allows the control panel to be operated using either of these two accessories 2 Handover Delay To Be Sequential If this option has been enabled handover delay will be sequential i e In numerical order from lowest to highest If the sequence is broken before the entry time expires an alarm will occur If this option is not enabled handover delay will follow the entry path provided that a delay zone has been triggered first 4 Codepad Panic To Be Silent If this option has been enabled a codepad panic alarm will not operate the horn
53. Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning essesesseeessresesresseseesrssrsrreerresrestertssrerresertrnesrsserrreresrenesre 181 Codepad Connections For Partitioning 0 0 0 eee ee ceseesecesecesecsecseecaeeeseeeaeeseessecesecsecsaecsaecsaecsaecsecsaecsaecaeeeaaseaeeensennees 182 Optional Equipment css rss n cscavgecheeang TEE 186 TERMINAL DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS csscsssssscsssssssssscscssssssessssscesssesssessesseeee 193 TERMINAL DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS AAA 194 Solution 16 Wiring Diagram ENEE dese NEESS 196 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 Fixed 3K3 EOL Resistorg esses cseesseeeceeeeesreceseceaecseecaeeeaeseesenseeeeenseens 197 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 Variable EOL Resistors A 197 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation 0 0 0 0 ecceeceeeeceeeceeecesecesececesecesecsaecsaecsaecaessseeeeeseeeeeees 198 Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 0 eeceecesecesecssecseecseecseeeaeeeaecnsecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeeeaeseaeseneeanees 198 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch occ cseceseeeeeeeceeseesecesecsecseesecsaecnaecsaecaeecaaseaeseaeeeeeeeeeeaeess 199 Connections For 25 Pin Mop eine ED rssi nee epee ere EEE EENE A ERE E Eea oE EE E pe S ISEE 199 Connections For 9 Pin Logging Printer eee ee ceececesecesecesecesecseecaeecneeeaeeeaeeseesecesecsecsaecsaecsaecseecaaseseseaeeeeeeeeseatess 199 Solution 16 Component Overlay 0 0 0 ceeeecesccesecssecssecseecseecseseaeeseeeeeceeces
54. V1 31 Table 103 Dialler Options 2 1 Open Close Reports Only After Alarm This option requires Open Close Reports in LOCATION 504 505 enabled on page 120 for it to be effective An opening report will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed after an alarm has occurred When the system has been armed a closing report will be transmitted This feature can also be used in conjunction with the Patrolman Code Refer to Patrolman Code on page 99 for more information If the system has been partitioned an Open Close report will only be transmitted on the area that the alarm had occurred Note If the system is disarmed when an alarm occurs only a closing report will be transmitted when the system is next armed 2 First To Open Last To Close Reporting Partitioned Systems Only This option needs to be enabled if only one Open Close report is required when the system has been partitioned Rather than having individual Open Close reports for each area a closing report will be transmitted only when ALL areas have been armed and an opening report will be transmitted as soon as one area has been disarmed The reports will be transmitted on the Subscriber ID Number allocated to that particular area Subscriber ID Numbers and Open Close reports must be programmed for all areas 4 Open Close Reports In STAY Mode Allowed If open and close reports are required when the system is armed in STAY Mode or
55. Via Serial Printer ccscccss cssessseeseeschessstsebessvspesscessnesbepsneedssoosoenedpesssnsonnsonseeposensenseesssonsbeesenss 89 Printer Output Paola usetze egenen a oe sehen dee Ol baie aroun Geass vor SAG lank eege dE 89 BASE STA TION INFORMA TION eege Eegeregie JT BASE STA PON INFORMA TION E ceil ote eeve aves sta sees ces sonst eeh 92 How To Program A Phone Number vis c 2 ce escsdseceescetevescusce EENS EENS SEENEN 92 Primary Telephone N mber renesanse r gta cae aoe esa akece NEE 92 secondary Telephone Number isese sssesseeasicseg REESEN copezedeedsbaces REESEN r EES ETTE E SEESE Erro ENEE 93 Callback Telephone Numbers ege ed eebe eege el 93 Dialling Formats ege EEN Eeer tte audios Seti gene eect 93 Handshake Tones eea E E E E ee Re A es ENEE ee eS estat bt 94 Transmission Format beses aroei raen teas coat eo o Eneee aaa sp RESES eros E EEEE e a EEEE RE EEEn Pa aS SenncdeePebenone 94 PLANSINUSSIONS DEE 2 APSE ETE E ETE EE OEE AEE E eppagevouncoptueteaupevecg dt tetbevcesteneenienane 95 Subscriber ID TEE 96 Ring Counte n E A dial T E R eh ae a ee A arte N 96 Answering Machine Bypass sesiis esiaren ir eene i en EE rE er S i EEE EE EEES E EES ES TEET A E E E 96 ACCESS RRE 98 Installer Code sce cock ern e aena ae a a e a ae E naea Ee eaa ARE En EE Segen ane paved bebe ETE S 98 UE 98 User Code Eesen Nae at a a te Heed ete a a ta ee ee 99 Auxiliary CODES E 101 Auxiliary Gode T aerer user ies cutie chest ee ea tea tenes R ge
56. a zone is sealed or unsealed 3 Press the AWAY button to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish INSTALLER cone 4 AWAY 5 Satellite Siren Service Mode If an EDMSAT is connected to Output 1 this mode will allow you to perform service work on the satellite siren without triggering the siren or the strobe The unit will return to its normal working state the next time the system is armed How To Enter Satellite Siren Service Mode 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 5 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard INSTALLER cope 5 AWAY ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 49 7 Telephone Monitor Mode On and Off Telephone monitor mode allows the remote codepad to be used for a visual representation of data transmissions between the control panel and the base station receiver The dialling sequence is also shown in this mode The codepad will beep once every two seconds while telephone monitor mode is turned on regardless of whether the system is in Installer s Programming Mode or normal operating mode The first five indicators are used to display the progressive steps for a transmission to the base station receiver Zone LED Dialling Event Telephone Line Seized Dialling Phone Number 4 Data 1s Being Transmived Table 17 Telephone Monitor Mode Indications How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode
57. an output programmed with Output Event Type Timed Output will automatically operate Refer to Output Event Types on page 127 for more information This time must be set in 24 hour format i e 10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230 Siren Run Time LOCATION 660 10 Location Description 660 Siren Run Time Increments Of 1 Minute Table 93 Siren Run Time Locations The siren run time determines how long the horn speaker will activate during alarm condition The siren run time can be programmed between 0 15 minutes 1 minute Siren Run Time LOCATION 660 5 Location Description 660 Siren Run Time Increments Of 1 Minute Table 94 Siren Run Time Locations V2 04 The siren run time determines how long the horn speaker will activate during alarm condition The siren run time can be programmed between 0 15 minutes 1 minute Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 146 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Siren Sound Rate LOCATION 661 7 Location Description Siren Sound Rate 0 SLOWEST 15 FASTEST Table 95 Siren Run Time Locations The siren sound rate varies the frequency of the siren tone Zero rate is the slowest and fifteen is the fastest rate This siren sound rate does not change the frequency rate for the fire alarm tone Swinger Shutdown Count LOCATION 662 0 Location Description Swinger Shutdown Count 0 15 Table 96 Swing
58. arm as well This allows the user to ensure that pressing one extra button rather than entering a user code at each area codepad will arm all areas For this feature to function enable Option 1 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 This process can be carried out from either the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads or the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepads How To Arm Or Disarm All Areas That The Code Belongs To At The Same Time 1 Enter your USER CODE followed by O and the AWAY J button Two beeps will be heard USER CODE J O Away ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 61 Hold Down Functions Hold down functions are incorporated to allow easy activation of specific operations When a button is held down for two seconds two beeps will be heard and a particular function will operate The functions available are listed below Arm The System In AWAY Mode Holding the away button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in the AWAY Mode Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 for setting this feature If the system has been partitioned holding the button down until two beeps are heard on the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad will only arm the area that the codepad is allocated to in AWAY Mode This hold down function does not operate on the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as pressing the away button will toggle you to th
59. as user codes 33 and 34 How To Add Or Change A User Code 1 Note Enter your MASTER cone followed by T and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the USER NUMBER 1 34 that you wish to alter followed by the AWAYJ button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 53 Enter the digits required for the new CODE followed by the LAWAYJ button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to change any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required MASTER CODE awa USER NUMBER away NEW CODE away When adding or changing user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds Pressing the away button will also terminate the session at anytime One long beep indicates the code entered already exists an incorrect user number was selected or the area allocation of the user code is incorrect if the system has been partitioned Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 52 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual How To Delete A User Code Software Version 1 10 Only 1 Enter your MASTER CODE followed by 1 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and
60. been dialled At the end of the 90 seconds the control panel will send two beeps followed by a pause This will be repeated over a 20 second period During this pause the control panel looks for an acknowledge tone If it is received within the next 20 seconds the control panel will hang up and make no further calls ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 83 Connection Of The Voice Module The Voice Module plugs onto the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the control panel Please ensure that all power to the control panel has been removed before connecting the voice module Remember to align the arrows on the voice module to those on the control panel Reconnect the power to the control panel once the voice module has been connected correctly EARPIECE STATUS INDICATOR SOCKET e RECORD REPLAY d SWITCH lt MICROPHONE ALIGNMENT ARROWS Figure 2 Diagram Of EDM Voice Module CC888 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 84 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Basic Pager Format Reporting Basic Pager Format requires some interpretation of the numbers that appear on the display however it is possible to differentiate between 1000 different control panels when a number of control panels are reporting to the one pager To use this feature you will require to program the following software options 1 LOCATION 000 015 requires
61. belong to that are currently being displayed 4 Status Indicators A group of four indicators show the following ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 173 AUX Indicator This indicator will display the status of Zone 16 when the control panel has been partitioned If Option 4 has been enabled in LOCATION 669 the AUX indicator may be used to display when the control panel is using the telephone line MAINS Indicator This indicator displays the status of the AC mains supply i e If the MAINS indicator is illuminated the AC mains is normal and if the indicator is flashing the AC mains has been disconnected FAULT Indicator This indicator displays the status of the systems fault register i e If the indicator is flashing the system has detected a fault that has not yet been acknowledged If the indicator is illuminated the fault has been acknowledged and if the indicator is not illuminated the system has no system faults PARTIAL Indicator The partial indicator displays whether an area is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 i e If the PARTIAL indicator is illuminated an area is armed in either STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 and if the PARTIAL indicator is not illuminated no areas are armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Whilst isolating zones the PARTIAL indicator flashes to indicate that you are in the isolate mode This PARTIAL indicator will flash in conjunction with the AUX in
62. both the reporting and the audible alarms for codepad panic codepad fire and codepad medical alarms the following will need to be programmed In LOCATION 666 on page 155 Option 2 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent will need to be enabled You will also need to program LOCATION 483 on page 117 as 0 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 41 Isolating Zones When a zone is isolated access is allowed into that zone at all times Isolating zones is performed by one of two methods One way requires the use of a valid user code while the other way does not The ability to isolate zones is governed by the priority level allocated to each user code holder Some user code holders may not be able to isolate zones Refer to User Code Priority on page 99 for further details Twenty four hour zone types and zones not used cannot be isolated If isolation of these zones is attempted a long beep will be heard Standard Isolating 1 Press the LSTAYJ button twice Three beeps will be heard Enter the Zone NUMBER required to be isolated Press the LSTAYJ button Enter the next ZONE NUMBER required to be isolated Press the STAY J button Press the away button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated Two beeps will be heard Aw PY DN The isolated zones will now continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed The system is ready to be armed in AW
63. chenssaceeeisesees cients 87 Converting To Hexadecimal ce cee eeseeeseeeseees 88 Audible Indicatorg eeessccecssececeesseeecesceeeeenseeeenenaee 33 AUO APM eiren n E 144 Auto Arming Pre Alert Time ceeeesseceereeeeeeeeeee 144 Automatic Stepping Of Locations ee eeeeeeeeee 28 AUX Indicator arenen ENEE EENS sdb 173 Display When Telephone Line In Use ee 160 Auxiliary Code L i iinr siisii r krss 101 Auxiliary Code testen Seele E ER 101 Auxiliary Codes ccsccssccssseccsesscsseccsnescstecoseeeonee 52 101 Output Event Type oo eee e t a a i 131 AWAY Andicator ns ERA E E 32 34 AWAY Mode Automatic Am 157 Enable Single Button Arming ee eee eee eeeeee 161 Latebing Inputsssicsdssececcesdhececctecisneccevetvensessined ee 163 165 Momentary Input 163 164 B Base Station Information Dialling Format spist isie eseis irisi 93 ISSUE222 DOC Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Handshake Tone cccceeceesecsseceesecsseeeseseesaeensees 94 Primary Telephone Number A 92 Programming Telephone Numbers cesses 92 Secondary Telephone Number 93 Subscriber ID Number 96 Transmission Format 0 ccccescesesecseceseeeesseeensees 94 Transmission need 95 Basi Pager oss ccssnccsevceslssvevssndsdeescnsoseettedevedevbeesenany se dee 84 Battery Test Only On AtMin 83 secssecsccorysivecscnccsdesdesdeedetseevecascotessvces 168 Bell Testis eege eet dee 62 Busy Tone Detection
64. detector To configure an output for this feature use the following settings EVENT TYPE 2 7 POLARITY 10 TIMEBASE 2 MULTIPLIER 15 The zone that the fire smoke detector is connected to should be programmed as follows ZONE TYPE 13 OPTION 0 ZONE PULSE COUNT 3 ZONE TIME 15 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 131 2 8 2 20 Remote Control 1 2 D Remote Control 2 Remote Control 3 2 NE Remote Control 4 These outputs can be remotely activated Turned On or Off via the following methods 1 Remote Codepad Refer to Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for further information 2 Remotely Via Touch Tone Phone Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 and Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for further information 3 Remotely Via Alarm Link Software Refer to your Alarm Link Instruction Manual for further information 4 Remotely Via Safecom Radio Link Refer to Safecom Remote Operation Of Outputs on page 126 for further information Auxiliary Code 1 This output will operate when Auxiliary Code 1 has been entered The output will reset when Auxiliary Code 1 has been entered again The output can be activated via the remote codepad the Alarm Link Software CC816 or a touch tone telephone if a DTMF Command Module CC886 has been enabled and connected to the control panel Auxiliary Code 2 This output will op
65. dialler tester simulates a base station for testing of the control panel s dialling functions It communicates in most formats Cellular Dialler The cellular dialler when connected to the control panel will transmit alarm information via the cellular phone network to the base station receiver when a land telephone line is not present or has been tampered with PS100 Power Supply Module P 100 The PS100 Power Supply Module has been designed for applications requiring 13 8 volts DC at currents of up to 1 Amp and must be used in conjunction with the TF008 18 volt AC plug pack The unit comes complete with our standard fully short circuit proof power out and battery charging terminals as well as a DC LED indicator and AC mains fail output For situations requiring an uninterrupted power source a rechargeable sealed lead acid battery can be fitted In the event of a mains failure the power supply will switch to battery power without interrupting the load being supplied TF008 Plug Pack TF008 The TFO08 plug packs have been designed to be used with the EDM control panels and the PS100 Power Supply Module The plug pack includes built in thermal fuses that under overload or fault conditions will blow and eliminate any possible fire threat due to excessive heat build up inside the casing The TFO08 plug pack incorporates a three wire flying lead that enables a mains earth connection to be made between the equipment and the plug pack This c
66. drops below approximately 10 5V a low battery condition is generated and reported accordingly The control panel will continue to test the battery even when the battery has failed a previous load test Enabling this option will cancel the 4 hourly dynamic battery tests if there is a current low battery condition The control panel will still however test the battery every time the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 169 Carrier Sync Options LOCATION 899 9 Carrier Sync Time 2 wm Table 119 Carrier Sync Time The micro chip that operates the S o lut ion 16 control panel simulates a 300 baud modem Generally a telecommunications interface Phone Line Interface incorporates a 2 wire to a 4 wire conversion so that the information that you transmit is separate to the information that you receive However in the So lut ion 16 control panel there is no 2 wire to 4 wire conversion What is transmitted is also received This is like talking on a phone handset and hearing yourself talk When two modems are connected they exchange tones with each other that allow them to communicate with one another The sync tone a modem sends to another modem is called a carrier Generally to remain in sync each modem must receive the other modems carrier If a carrier has been lost some modems initiate an error correction algorithm B
67. needs to be fitted The EDMSAT requires only two wires for operation on which the charging of the battery and triggering of the siren and strobe are carried out This is done by pulse code modulating PCM the charging voltage Any attempt to tamper with the wiring or to substitute an alternative power source across the wiring will disrupt the data transmission and the EDMSAT will activate immediately When the EDMSAT carries out a battery test the unit will sound for two seconds if the battery test fails EDMSTU Securitel Interface CS800 This EDMSTU Securitel Interface has been designed to operate in conjunction with the Solution 16 control panel using a serial connection This means that all alarm information can be transmitted from the control panel to the EDMSTU using only 3 wires The EDMSTU provides full serial reporting of alarms opening and closing reports isolations and user ID information The monitoring control room also monitors line integrity Hand Held Programmer CC814 The hand held programmer is used to program the locations in the Solution 16 control panel The unit displays the actual location number and the data value currently programmed It comes complete with a one metre connecting cable and a socket for an external programming key Programming Key CC891 The programming key is a unique device that will store all programming information programmed in your control panel once copied to the programming key The p
68. one to seven digits long However after the control panel has been powered up the Installer Code can disarm the system if it is the first code used The next time the Installer Code is used access into Installer s Programming Mode will be gained LOCATION 064 319 The purpose of user codes is to arm and disarm the system as well as perform other specific functions as described in Master Code Functions on page 50 User codes can be any length between one to seven digits long Each user code can have a different priority level allocated to it This controls the behaviour of the code allowing it to arm only or to arm and disarm etc This priority level of each user code is programmed in the last location of each user code 2580 L155 J15 12 User Code Priority There are a total of 32 user codes available that can be altered or deleted at any time by a Master Code holder Multiple Master Codes can be programmed Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information on adding deleting or changing user codes Note The priority level for each user code can only be programmed or altered by the installer ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Access Codes 99 User Code Priority There are seven different priority levels that can be allocated to the user code Each priority level allows or restricts the functions that different user code holders can perform Note 12 Once user code priori
69. page 78 for further information How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers 1 Enter your MasteR cone followed by 2 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash If there are telephone numbers programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the zone indicators on the codepad Refer to Table 20 Indicators For Changing Phone Numbers on page 54 for the indicators and their meanings If there are no telephone numbers programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last phone number has been displayed 2 Enter the required phone number Each number will be displayed as it entered 3 After each phone number press the stay J button before entering the next phone number This separates the end of the first phone number and the beginning of the next 4 After the last phone number has been entered press the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 2 AWAY PHONE No 4 4 STAY 4 PHONE No 2 STAY 4 PHONE No 3 4 AWAY How To Disable Domestic Dialling If at any time the user wishes to cancel domestic dialling for any reason eg They are moving house and they do not wish the system to continue calling their work place or mobile phone etc they may enter the followed by 2 the away button the STAY J button and th
70. sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 39 Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2 There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 2 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and requires to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 161 Note Method two will not operate unless Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 amp STAY Mode 2 has also been enabled Method One How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2 1 Enter your cone followed by the STAY J button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone CODE STAY OR CODE AWAY Method Two A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone If this is the case a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system To enable method two Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 will need to be enabled How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2 1 Hold down button O until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system will be disarmed 0 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 40 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Codepad Duress Alarm A codepad duress alarm can be used as a hold up alarm This will occur when th
71. sens E A Sesh bed sewers e E 118 Low Battery enee REENEN 119 ProgramAltered Code aen enger Aa ete A Ee AE Ee ees Aa ee EE a 119 SOMSOL Watch usser Svessestaeesses Seas T E E ET 120 Open Close Reports For Area loeser ar r tpssfevoencavadedesapevedk A Erde idee SEET d t SEA dt 120 Safecom RE EE 121 Satecom Telco Fall etene a A a E a E S E TE A E tie ees 121 Salecom RE Jamming iesite possesses E E r EE EEES SEE EO E EE EEE EE TETEE EEN 121 TEstREPOLS eni eoii S ETE E Se TE E E N ee e E R ce aimee aerate AE 122 KE EE 122 PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS viiisiscetscesscteis discccstiosacidaisctavssicsctsestocdansideesesces sSsesscdsieteadsciadssissevediscee 123 PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS is2 ees ed reao ee eE DE dE EES EENEG 124 Output Confipurationss ec ed a eo Rs EE Re eee eta 125 Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer 126 Safecom Remote Operation OF OUDITS eessen Seeerei 126 LEE 126 OUTPUT EVENT PYPES geet 127 Output Polarity Software Version 20 140 134 On Output Not Used WEE 134 L Normally Opens Going LOW ieres ei eese ineno I EEEE EE EE EEE E EEEE EEES E e a e 134 2 Normally Open Pulsing LOW nistrene hee ee a E T E S EE ee de ieee 134 3 Normally Open One Shot LOW siseses ae erar E e AEE rE a E KE Eh TE EES rE Rasi 134 4 Normally Open One Shot Low With Retrigger A 134 5 Normally Open One Shot Low With Reset AA 134 6 Normally Open One Shot Low With Alarm 134 7 Normally Open Latchine Low sissies doses ssdsce sha stcsdees
72. solely for remote control of external devices connected to the two on board relays The interface s operating frequency is 304 Mhz with the ability to store up to 120 radio remote codes When connecting the interface to a Solution control panel there is only a three wire connection in parallel to the codepad and Option 1In LOCATION 666 on page 155 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 190 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Radio On Off Home Panic ARENA EDM 4 CHANNEL RECEIVER EXPANDER REO04 ON OFF HOME SPARE PANIC NOTE ALL OUTPUTS MUST BE SET TO MOMENTARY CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO ON OFF R K HOME Gel mem COM Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Control Panel Interface CC813 NOTE R K BEEPS MUST BE ENABLED IF REQUIRED LOCATION 665 MUST CONTAIN 8 Keyswitch On Off Keyswitch r O O 3 I I O O Keyswitch Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch NOTE 1 Momentary Contact Control Panel Interface CC813 EE must NOTE 2 Panic Switch must be momentary contact NOTE ENABLE KEYSWITCH INTERFACE MODULE LOCATION 666 MUST CONTAIN 1 Figure 11 Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 Connection Diagram ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 191 Keyswitch On Off Panic Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Panic Switch Control Panel Inter
73. speaker the bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not enabled all three outputs will operate after a codepad panic alarm has been activated Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler Note If the control panel has a Software Version Number 1 37 or higher a codepad fire or a codepad medical alarm will be audible irrespective of this option being enabled or disabled To disable the codepad fire and codepad medical alarms ALL codepad alarms will need to be disabled from transmitting alarms to the base station receiver For this to be achieved program LOCATION 483 on page 117 as a zero This will disable all reporting of codepad alarms and enable codepad fire and codepad medical alarms to be silent 8 Access Denied Codepad Tamper To Be Silent If this option has been enabled a codepad tamper alarm will not operate the horn speaker bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not enabled all three outputs will operate after a codepad tamper alarm has occurred Refer to LOCATION 338 on page 101 to set the number of Code Retries before an alarm condition occurs Enabling this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 156 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Options 3 LOCATION 667 0 Description Area 1 Codepad Connected To Main Data Terminal Modem Module Required F
74. the button is pressed positioning you at the next location ready for programming If the decimal point is extinguished the auto step mode is disabled The next programming location will need to be manually selected by pressing the button As you can see from the examples below auto step mode is a very useful feature when programming successive locations How To Enable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 1 Enter command 9 6 6 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard How To Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 1 Enter command 9 6 6 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard Example Auto Step Enabled To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 pause 9 672 1055 with auto step enabled i e Decimal point illuminated Press O followed by the button This will position you at LOCATION 000 being the start of the Primary Telephone Number ole 2 03J 494 6 4 7 4 2 4 SG a Ff oe bag a BO ge Example Auto Step Disabled To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 pause 9 672 1055 with auto step disabled i e Decimal point extinguished Press O followed by the button This will position you at LOCATION 000 being the start of the Primary Telephone Number MJ 42 4 4 434 494 46 4 4H4 7 4 4H 42 4 H 414 4L04 5 4 54 4 0 Command 999 Display Software Version Number This command will display the control panel s software version number This co
75. the control panel will answer an incoming call 4 Upload Download Via Alarm Link Software This option will need to be enabled if you require to use the Alarm Link Software CC816 to remotely program the control panel The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link Software if this option has not been enabled For direct Upload Download operations via the Direct Link Cable CC808 this option does not need to be set Whether the dialler reporting functions Option 1 of this location are enabled or disabled this will have no effect on Upload Download operations 8 Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm If the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software CC816 and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link session will be terminated and the relevant alarm message will be transmitted to the base station receiver If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver the session will not be terminated If this option is not enabled and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link software will prompt the operator with a Terminate or Continue message ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 153 Dialler Options 2 LOCATION 664 0 Description Open Close Reports Only After Alarm First To Open Last To Close Reporting Partitioned Systems Only Open Close Reports In STAY Mode Allowed Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed
76. the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the USER NUMBER 1 34 that you wish to delete followed by the AWAYJ button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 53 Press the AWAY button to delete the user code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to erase any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required MASTER CODE 1 AWAY USER NUMBER AWAY AWAY How To Delete A User Code Software Version 1 20 1 Note Enter your Mueres cone followed by T and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the USER NUMBER 1 34 that you wish to delete followed by the AWAY J button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 53 Press the STAY button to delete the user code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to erase any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required MASTER CODE away USER NUMBER away eran When deleting user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds Pressing the away but
77. use decadic dialling and your control panel must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table as it does not implement the New Zealand Reverse Dialling standard Number to be dialled 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Number to be programmed 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 oo O Note that where DTMF dialling is used the numbers should be entered normally The transmit level from this device is set as a fixed level and because of this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal Before reporting such occurrences as faults please check the line with a standard telepermitted telephone ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 18 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Programming The programming options of this control panel are stored in a non volatile EPROM This memory will hold all the relevant configuration and user specific data even during a total power loss The data retention time is as long as ten years without power therefore no reprogramming will be required after powering the control panel down The data can be altered as many times as required without the need for any additional specialised equipment This memory is laid out in numerous locations each of which holds the data for a specific function In general the entire programming sequence will consist of nominating the location number required and then entering or altering the data You w
78. via the telephone line To disable this function program the time to zero Refer to Safecom RF Fail on page 121 for more information on reporting ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 143 System Date LOCATION 644 649 Software Version 1 20 010195 Location Description 64 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit 646 Month Of The Year Tens Digit Month Of The Year Units Digit Current Year Tens Digit 649 Current Year Units Digit Table 87 System Date Locations Software Version 1 20 LOCATION 644 649 Software Version 1 10 Only 110195 Location Description Current Year Tens Digit Current Year Units Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit i Table 88 System Date Locations Software Version 1 10 Only Solution 16 has areal time 12 month calendar that needs to be set during installation Setting The Date and Time This function needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the system has been powered down How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your MasteR cone followed by 6 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format 3 Press the AWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE
79. will not operate when the system has been partitioned How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones 1 Enter your Mueres cone followed by 8 and the AWAY J button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash 2 Enter the ZONE NUMBER that you wish to automatically isolate followed by the STAY button The ZONE indicator will now begin to flash 3 If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated repeat step 2 until all zones required have been set 4 Press the AWAY button to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish MASTER CODE 8 AWAY ZONE NUMBER STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY AWAY Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 60 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual User Code Functions Partitioned Systems Only USER CODE FUNCTION AWAY Function Description L 0o Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only Table 23 User Code Functions 0 Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only This option allows the user to arm and disarm all areas that the code is assigned to at the same time All areas that the code belongs to will arm or disarm to follow the state of the area that the code was entered from i e If you disarm an area all other areas will disarm or if you arm an area all other areas will
80. 2 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 141 Exit Time The control panel has three separate Exit Times Exit time can be programmed to be between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second The remote codepad will always give one beep at the end of exit time when arming in AWAY Mode or one short beep at the end of exit time when arming in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Exit Time For AWAY Mode LOCATION 632 633 Defaulted To 60 Seconds E Location Description 1 Second Increments For Exit Time For AWAY Mode 16 Second Increments For Exit Time For AWAY Mode Table 79 Exit Time For AWAY Mode Locations Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 LOCATION 634 635 Defaulted To 60 Seconds 3 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 16 Second Increments For Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 Table 80 Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 Locations Exit Time For STAY Mode 2 LOCATION 636 637 Defaulted To 60 Seconds E Location Description 1 Second Increments For Exit Time For STAY Mode 2 16 Second Increments For Exit Time For STAY Mode 2 Table 81 Exit Time For STAY Mode 2 Locations Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode LOCATION 638 639 Defaulted To 60 Seconds IK Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode 16 Second Increments For Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode Table 82 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode Locations Entry Guard Time For ST
81. 222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 25 Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key This command is used to copy the control panel memory to the programming key How To Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming Key 1 2 3 4 5 Enter Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel Enter command 9 6 2 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the control panel s memory has now been copied into the programming key Enter command 9 6 OQ followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Disconnect the programming key from the control panel How To Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 2 n Before connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 9 6 2 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the control panel s memory has now been copied into the programming key Enter command 9 6 OQ followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Leave the switch on the hand held programmer in the EXT position and disconnect the programming key Command 963 Copy From Progra
82. 2V AND COM Siren or Screamer Strobe 8 Ohm Speaker Siren solucion 6 Smoke Detector YELLOW Seen GREEN RED Toy TTT TT Ting TTT BLACK ILL e SSC SS Battery 12v 6 5Ah CODEPAD YELLOW YELLOW 18VAC 1 3A Plug Pack TF008 Figure 13 Solution 16 Wiring Diagram ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 197 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 Fixed 3K3 EOL Resistors 12V Z16 215 214 213 12V GND 212 211 Z10 Z9 12V JP2 Power Detector SOLUTION 16 ZONE EXPANDER JP1 Figure 14 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 Fixed 3K3 Ohm EOL Resistor Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 Variable EOL Resistors 12V Z16 Z15 Z14 Z13 12V GND Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 12V JP2 VARIABLE ZONE SOLUTION 16 EXPANDER Detector E RP1 PGM NETWORK JP1 Figure 15 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 Variable EOL Resistor Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 198 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation EOL EOL EOL EOL Standard Eight Zone 3K3 Configuration N C 3K3 EOL 16 Zone 3K3 6K8 Zone 1 Configuration N C If N O Switches Are Used Both 6K8 EOL Zones Will Trip If Eith
83. 327 15 J 15 154 15 15 154 15 2 Auxiliary Code 2 LOCATION 328 335 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 2 Priority Level Description Operate When The System Is Armed Operate When The System Is Disarmed Operate Always As Long As No Alarm Memories Are Present 5 Operate If Armed amp No Alarm Memories Are Present Operate If Disarmed amp No Alarm Memories Are Present Operate If Armed Or Disarmed amp No Alarm Memories Are Present Table 47 Auxiliary Code Priority Levels Operate When The System Is Armed Or Disarmed When the control panel has been partitioned the Auxiliary Codes are global to all areas This means that an output that is controlled from an Auxiliary Code can be operated from all areas Auxiliary Codes cannot be dedicated to an area Code Retries LOCATION 338 6 Code retries restricts the amount of times an invalid user code can be used in an attempt to operate the system This location sets the number of incorrect code attempts that will cause an alarm condition When the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in this location the system will carry out the following 1 Activate the sirens internal screamers and strobes connected to the control panel Refer to LOCATION 666 on page 155 to enable Access Denied To Be Silent 2 Shutdown all codepads Including CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads and CPS Master Partitioned CP500P codepads that are connecte
84. 4 Location 444 451 DOOOnREOE Event Code Dialler Units Digit Channel Page 104 Each zone contains eight locations that are divided into two groups of four The first four locations determine how the zone operates while the second four locations contain the dialler reporting information Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 214 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Zone Types There are fifteen different zone types to choose from Each zone can be programmed as any one of the zone types listed in the table below Zone Type Description Zone Type Description A Imstant LB Delay Isolated In STAY Mode 1 LL Handover 9 Dei Isolated In STAY Moie A JL Delay 3 A3 our Burglary i 6 Instant IsolatedInSTAY Model 14 Chime Only Handover Isolated In STAY Mode 1 Zone Not Used Zone Options Zone Option Description 4 SilentAlam OOO Oo O O o s Sensor Watch Zone Pulse Count Settings The pulse count settings for each zone can be programmed between 0 15 Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the number of pulses must register 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time 0 0 5 Second 8 20 Seconds 1 1 Second 9 30 Seconds 2 2 Seconds 10 40 Seconds 3 3 Seconds 11 50 Seconds 4 4 Seconds 12 60 Seconds 5 5 Seconds 13 90 Seconds
85. 5 Program Output 2 as all zeros in LOCATION 546 552 Disable Option 1 in LOCATION 663 if the control panel is not going to use the on board dialler Connect the EDMSTU to the So lut ion 16 control panel using the table below Once the EDMSTU has been connected to the control panel the EDMSTU will now need to be upped by the monitoring station EE gg Solution 16 EDMSTU Output D ERD Table 32 EDMSTU Connection Terminals Refer to your EDMSTU Installation Manual for further information Securitel and Partitioning The EDMSTU CS800 was not designed to transmit individual Open Close Reports for each area via the Securitel Network It will however transmit First To Open Last To Close Reporting if Option 2 in LOCATION 664 has been enabled Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 78 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Domestic Reporting The Primary Telephone Number and the Secondary Telephone Number locations that are normally used for base station reporting can be added together making provision to store up to 32 digits The 32 data locations are now used to store any number of telephone numbers and subject to the length of each of the telephone numbers it is possible to store 3 or more different telephone numbers for Domestic Dialling Format Programming Domestic Reporting Programming the control panel for Domestic Reporting has been made extr
86. 50 1 Enter the desired transmission format here This location selects the data format that will be transmitted to the monitoring station receiver This location also allows you to configure the control panel for domestic synthesised voice or pager reporting formats Option Transmission Format Option Transmission Format l 2 4 2 Express 3 4 2 Pulsed Reserved Reserved Domestic Reserved Alpha Pager Synthesised Voice EEN Basic Pager Eo 3 1 Pulsed Expanded Table 45 Transmission Formats ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Base Station Information 95 Transmission Speed LOCATION 051 2 This location selects the speed at which data is transmitted to the base station receiver when Low Speed Pulsed transmission formats are used Altering this location will only effect pulsed transmission formats Transmission Speed Option Transmission Speed 1 Pulse Per Second 20 Pulses Per Second 10 Pulses Per Second 20 Pulses Per Second Fixed Digit Length 15 Pulses Per Second o 40 Pulses Per Second Receivers and Their Formats The following is a list of some compatible control room receivers their specific handshake tones and transmission formats Use this table only as a guide when selecting the transmission format Receiver Type Transmission Format Silent Knight 10 PPS 1400 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 Ademco Slow Sescoa 20 PPS 2300 Hz 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 Franklin DCI Vertex
87. AY Mode is the delay time used for ALL ZONES except 24 hour burglary and 24 hour fire zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Each zone including delay zones will have the entry delay as programmed in LOCATION 638 639 i e The delay time programmed for a delay zone will be overridden by the entry guard timer If the entry guard timer has been programmed as 0 each zone will act as per its programmed zone type Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 142 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Codepad Lockout Time LOCATION 640 641 00 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Codepad Lockout Time 16 Second Increments For Codepad Lockout Time Table 83 Codepad Lockout Timer Locations All codepads will be locked out for the specified time programmed if the wrong code has been entered more times than allowed by the code retry attempts in LOCATION 338 on page 101 If the Codepad Lockout Time is programmed as zero no lockout will occur Sensor Watch Time LOCATION 642 643 00 Location Description Number Of Days Tens Digit Number Of Days Units Digit Table 84 Sensor Watch Timer Locations The time set in these two locations determines how many days 0 99 a zone may remain sealed before registering as a fault This feature is only active when the system is in the disarmed state If a zone programmed for sensor watch has not triggered and reset duri
88. AY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY AWAY Code To Isolate f Press the _STAYJ button 2 Enter your CODE 3 Press the STAY J button Three beeps will be heard Enter the required to be isolated Press the STAY J button Enter the next required to be isolated Press the STAY J button Press the away button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated Two beeps will be heard Sp SN Ue The isolated zones will now continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed The system is ready to be armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY CODE STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY AWAY As each zone is isolated the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash If a mistake is made press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by the STAY J button This zone is now no longer isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 42 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Fault Analysis Mode Whenever a system fault occurs the FAULT or MAINS indicator will flash and the codepad will beep once every minute If the MAINS indicator is flashing this is because the AC mains has been disconnected There is no need to determine this type of system fault Pressing the away J button
89. Board Fitted If an eight zone expansion board is required to connect the additional zones 9 16 there is a choice of two different zone expansion boards that may be purchased The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 can use variable resistor values allowing you to use one EOL resistor value for zones 1 8 and another EOL resistor value for zones 9 16 The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 can only be used with a fixed 3K3 EOL resistor value This means that zones 1 8 can have any EOL resistor value from the available options in LOCATION 339 on page 112 and only 3K3 EOL resistors for zones 9 16 2 Eight Channel Output Board Fitted The Eight Channel Output Board CC884 allows the total number of programmable outputs to total 14 The eight channel output board provides terminals for programmable outputs 7 14 Note A plug in Termination Board CC882 is available for the following keyswitch input options 3 Momentary Input For Arm and Disarm A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 has been enabled the horn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY Mode ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Man
90. Control Panel To Ken 25 964 Erase Programming Key 26 965 Domestic Dialling ee cece eeeeeeseeeseeees 27 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations EE 28 999 Software Version Number 28 Communications Failure cee eesecesseeeseceseeeeeeees 43 Component Overlay 0 cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesee 200 Consumer Options 1 159 160 Consumer Options 7 161 Contact E 72 eg 73 CP5 Area Addressable Codepad A 188 CP5 Eight Zone Codepad wo A 187 CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad AAA 188 CP5 Sixteen Zone Codepad 00 0 eee eceeeeeseesseeeeeeees 188 D Date and Time 42 58 143 149 Allow Internal Crystal To Keep me 167 LR 110 Enable STAY Indicator To Display Status 160 E E 110 Operation sss desen eege Ae stevie SE 111 Partitioning sensin A Eder Sde N ode SE 111 RESCUING nsi Ee 110 Turn On OF fs oii ccdevvcs cove ir a rti 58 62 IR ET E 24 29 LEE EE 105 Delay 1 Zone Isolate In STAY 1 0 ee eee eee eens 105 Delay 2 ZOnG i202 cese tes A tantetss E E as 105 Delay 2 Zone Isolate In STAY 1 0 eee eee eens 106 Delay 3 ZOnG EE 105 Delay 3 Zone Isolate In STAY 1 0 eee eee eens 106 Delay 4 Eeer 105 Delay 4 Zone Isolate In STAY 1 0 eee eee eee 106 Dialler Amplifier Lead 187 Daller Options 1 152 Daller Options 7 153 175 Dialler Reporting Functions Enables Disable soi a a 152 Dialling de r E 93 Direct Contiect EE 69 Direc
91. DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming 109 Zone Pulse Count Handover Zone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count time options 8 15 Refer to Zone Pulse Count Time on page 109 for more information Any zone that registers one trigger pulse will automatically increment any other zones pulse count that has already registered at least one trigger pulse during its respective time To enable this option refer to LOCATION 667 on page 156 for further details Note From Software Version 1 37 onwards 24 hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones 24 hour zones may handover pulses to other zones Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the programmed number of pulses must register before an alarm condition is generated 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Option Pulse Count Time Option Pulse Count Time 0o 0 5 Seconds Ce O 20 Seconds 1 Second 9 30Seconds 40 Seconds a aseos o oa S oses e oseo S a SoSo o Table 51 Zone Pulse Count Times For zone pulse count time options 0 7 have a zone loop response time of 20 ms For zone pulse count time options 8 15 have a zone loop response time of 150 ms Loop response time is the length of time a zone must be triggered before it can register as unsealed or as a valid pulse Inertia sensors should use options 0 7 while PIR detectors
92. Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only Pa Walk TestMode SSCS LL Seming The Date and Time OoOO 8 Setting Zones ForSTAY Make O O Table 18 Master Code Functions 0 Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only This option allows the user to arm and disarm all areas at the same time that the code belongs to All areas that the code belongs to will arm or disarm to follow the state of the area that the code was entered from i e If you disarm an area all other areas will disarm or if you arm an area all other areas will arm as well This allows the user to ensure that pressing one extra button rather than entering a user code at each area codepad will arm all areas For this feature to function enable Option 1 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 This process can be carried out from either the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads or the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepads How To Arm Or Disarm All Areas That The Code Belongs To At The Same Time 1 Enter your masten cone followed by O and the AWAY J button Two beeps will be heard MASTER CODE O AWAY ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 51 1 Changing and Deleting User Codes This function allows a Master Code user to add change or delete any of the system user codes including Auxiliary Codes 1 and 2 The auxiliary codes are treated
93. E RJ45 PLUG Black Telecom Line Street Green Internal Phone Line Red Telecom Line Street Yellow Internal Phone Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR CHINA ee gt Telecom Line Telecom Line TOP VIEW TOP VIEW BLACK REAR VIEW CONTROL RED CH l 1 OF TELEPHONE PANEL GREEN l PLATE YELLOW f 4P4C PLUG RJ12 PLUG Int I Ph Green Internal Phone Line Black Telecom Line Street nema ones Yellow Internal Phone Line Red Telecom Line Street Figure 26 Telecom Connection Diagrams For Solution 16 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Appendices 206 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Appendix A Telephone Anti J amming There are many companies today importing American designed products that claim to have Anti Jamming and believe it or not they push this feature as if it were a major break through in control panel technology Well this in fact is not the case at all as most control panels have some sort of Anti Jamming feature We can go as far back as the early 1980 s where even the 678 diallers incorporated a form of Anti Jamming as a standard programmable option The important thing to note is that as most American designed products are primarily aimed at their local market and telephone networks when they are imported to Australia their anti jamming functi
94. ED LD1 on the printed circuit board In normal operation the LED will not illuminate The MAINS indicator will remain on as will the AWAY indicator The system is now in the armed state The lead acid back up battery should now be connected The lead acid rechargeable back up battery should be rated at 12v DC 6 5 Ah Enter the followed by the away button to disarm the system The AWAY indicator will extinguish The control panel is now in the disarmed state Programming of the control panel can now be accessed Refer to the Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information The factory default Master Code is 25 80 Enter the factory default INSTALLER CODE followed by the AWAY button to access the Installer s Programming Mode The STAY and AWAY indicators will now flash simultaneously Refer to LOCATION 56 62 on page 98 for the locations of the factory default Installer Code The factory default Installer Code is 1 2 3 4 Enter the Primary Telephone Number and the Secondary Telephone Number followed by the Subscriber ID Number If required program the test reporting time and any other programming changes to be made otherwise the programmed factory default settings will be used Enter command 9 6 0 followed by the away button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode The control panel will return to the disarmed state and is now ready for use Refer to page 42 for information on any system faults that may have occurred
95. EES EE ee Ee 142 Safecom RE Jamming Delage rees preen r aori E e REEE EnS EE EErEE ches SE S SEES KET EEEE E duer 142 Safecom RF S pervision TIME niie E E N Eege a A E N A REA 142 System Dle EE 143 Setting Che Date and Time 2s buede he ale eld ete ae 143 AOAN 82 KT 144 Auto Armins Re OR KI 144 Timed Output Pre Alert TINE seinere enoei rn econ cotanei deck cbeoes saved EE EE EREET EEA E E EE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE 145 Auto Operation Of The Timed Output snrsssoresi eer eni or EEE Ee eE EEE STEET arer ES ERTSE e er T renei eiste 145 Siren Run TIME EE 145 ten Gem Eege ed S E T See E E E E T 146 Swinger Shutdown Compte edd EENS EO EEKE EE TE EET SE 146 Swinger Shutdown Count For Sen 147 Swinger Shutdown Count For Daller s scc ssc sscssssesoedcees cotves tesosssssess gebavesdescabdptesescsesseusseniasasoescsvscebetsrecossassessgebavestesees sees 147 ng Burst Ltn er EE EE TE AETA EE EE deed didier Segen 148 Rime Burst De 148 System NET 149 Setting The Date and TIME ss s 5scessadssvescssssicsssehives cavessctesveseeg Soycsscebavesves EE EEES S E R E ESEE RETES TERES 149 OPTION BITS e e E E EE E A E a E E E EE E E EE a a EE ODE eee 152 Dirallet Opis AAE PETE EET EE EE EE Eisch E E AOE E 152 Dialler Opuons EE 153 System OPHONS DEE 154 RU 155 System OPLMONS EE 156 System OPtions 4e 2 sche hs ai has eh eves eh aE osean iee aaraa E a iea eee eaves Seas EE ot E SE EENE 157 System Options eege eee eis Be eS E E Real ee in Bee ee eee Bas 158 Cons
96. Ein Table 24 Fault Indicators Initiate A Modem Call Holding the D button down until two beeps are heard will force the control panel to dial the callback telephone number programmed in LOCATION 032 047 on page 93 in an attempt to connect to the remote computer The remote computer will be required to be running the Alarm Link Software CC816 and will need to be set to Waiting For An Incoming Call If no callback telephone number has been programmed entering this function will have no effect Reset Latching Outputs Holding the 7 button down until two beeps are heard will reset any programmable output that has been programmed to remain on once it has been activated The output will need to be programmed with a latching polarity Refer to Output Polarity on page 134 for further information Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 64 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual 8 Codepad ID and Buzzer Tone Change Holding the 8 button down for two seconds performs one of two functions The first function is to indicate the area that the codepad belongs to when the system has been partitioned The second function changes the tone of the codepad buzzer There are fifty different tones to choose from between 1500 Hz and 5000 Hz and they are specific to each codepad In a multiple codepad installation each codepad can have a different tone How To Determine The Area That The Codepad Belong
97. Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 166 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Telephone Line Fault Options LOCATION 673 0 Description Display FAULT Indicator If Telephone Line Fails Sound Alarm When System Is Armed If Telephone Line Fails Sound Alarm When System Is Disarmed If Telephone Line Fails Table 117 Telephone Line Fault Options The optional Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 may be connected to the LINE FAULT MODULE socket located towards the top right hand corner of the control panel to monitor the telephone line If the telephone line has been cut or disconnected for more than forty seconds the telephone line fault module will recognise this and the FAULT indicator will illuminate on the codepad The FAULT indicator will extinguish once the telephone line has been restored for more than forty seconds Note Option 2 and 4 will not operate unless option 1 has been enabled If option 1 has been enabled and no telephone line fault module has been connected to the control panel a FAULT indicator will illuminate and LOCATION 673 will need to be programmed back to the factory default value to clear the fault 1 Display FAULT Indicator If Telephone Line Fails The FAULT indicator will flash and the codepad buzzer will beep once every minute if the Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42
98. Event Code 351 will be transmitted via the Safecom network when the telephone line is disconnected This will only be reported if you are using a Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 with Location 673 programmed with a 7 Safecom RF Jamming LOCATION 768 771 3441 Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 7 68 69 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format 71 770 Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 7 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Point ID 50 V2 00 RF Jamming report Contact ID Event Code 344 will be transmitted when the safecom interface detects carrier for more than the specified period that is determined by the RF Jamming Delay feature in location 772 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 122 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Test Reports LOCATION 506 513 00000090 Location Description 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 i 513 Table 67 Test Report Locations A Test report Contact ID Event Code 602 is a specific signal that is transmitted to the base station receiver and is normally used to test the dialling and reporting functions of the control panel Test reports will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 When programming test reports the control panel needs to know the hour and minute of the day the report is re
99. For Domestic Dialling 168 Bypass REPOT oeoa E Se EEN E 114 C Call Back Telephone Number AAA 93 Carrier Sync Optt ong 169 Cellular Dialers piion e hiectsteeneedtes 188 Chime Re EE 106 ZONE KEE 106 Code Retri Si 002 101 Codepad CP5 Eight Sixteen Zone LCD eee ee eeeeeseeee 34 CP5 Eight Zone LEID 32 Duress E 40 Duress On irasara isea a EE N 116 Extinguish Mode 159 160 Bire large A Ee EE 40 ID and Buzzer Tone Change eee eeeeeeeesseeeeeees 64 Logout De eesosa e re eei pe a Sei k 142 Medical Alarm eeni anorte eenas 40 Panic Alama naana EC 40 Panie Reports eni ee E 117 Panic To Be Silentia nn 155 Tamper To Be Sen 155 Codepad Indicators Audible sai eani eo aore ee EE EE EEEE E 33 Ae a a is eo t 32 34 Disarm d EE 34 BA UST EE 33 34 Isolating Mode 34 ECH KEE 33 Off Indicator Zone Sealed A 34 On Indicator Zone In Alarm 34 STAY 6285 sili ein ti hs aoa AR aw 32 34 ZONES 85 285 She ed nbete ee leases 32 34 Codepads Area 1 Codepad As Main Codepad AN 181 Area 1 Codepad Setup 181 Area 2 Codepad Setup cssccccssscssecvsnescnsecssneeonnes 181 Area 3 Codepad Setup csseccsscsseevsrecssevoresonnne 181 Area 4 Codepad Setup 181 Master Partitioned Codepad Setup 181 Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status 23 959 Test Programming Key 24 960 Exit Installer s Programming Moden 24 961 Default System eee eee ceseeeseeenneeeeeeeees 24 962 Copy
100. IR will keep re triggering the output and lengthen the time the lights will remain switched on 5 Normally Open One Shot Low With Reset This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the one shot time has expired or when the event has returned to normal This means the operation of the output can be shortened regardless of the time parameter 6 Normally Open One Shot Low With Alarm This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired when the event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed This polarity is ideally suited for the operation of strobe lights as they can be timed Up to 99 hours to reset and prevent them from burning out or becoming annoying to others from prolonged operation 7 Normally Open Latching Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit once the 7 button on the remote codepad is held down until two beeps are heard Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 135 8 Normally Low Going Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs
101. If this option has been selected access to Master Code Functions may be performed via any touch tone telephone Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 163 Expansion Board Type LOCATION 672 Software Version 1 10 Only 0 Description No Expansion Board Fitted Eight Zone Expansion Board Eight Channel Output Board Momentary Keyswitch Input Latching Keyswitch Input Table 115 Expansion Board Type Software Version 1 10 Only This location enables the operation of an optional eight zone expansion board eight channel output board or keyswitch operated inputs to arm or disarm the system The keyswitch operated inputs need to be connected to the JP5 terminals EXP and GND Every time the system is armed or disarmed via the keyswitch operated input user code 32 will be transmitted with the Open Close reports Refer to Figure 18 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch on page 199 for more information on wiring the JP5 pins for keyswitch operation Note Only one option can be selected from the options listed in this location 0 No Expansion Board Fitted 1 Eight Zone Expansion Board Fitted If an eight zone expansion board is required to connect the additional zones 9 16 there is a choice of two different zone expansion boards that may be purchased The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 can use variable resistor val
102. La ki G i Table 36 ASCH Character Table Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 88 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Converting ASCII Characters To Hexadecimal To program an ASCII letter character and convert that to a number to be programmed refer to Table 37 Hexadecimal Conversion Table for converting letters and numbers to decimal numbers Example If you need to program an Alpha Pager Password with the letter L in upper case you would then program that letter as 4 12 Hexadecimal Conversion Table Hexadecimal Number Decimal Number Table 37 Hexadecimal Conversion Table PET Alpha Pager ID Number LOCATION 530 539 0000000000 The Pager ID Number locations are used to store the unique number that allows the network to identify individual pagers To program the Pager ID Number enter the decimal characters that represent the Pager ID Number Remember to substitute a 10 for a zero and to terminate the number with a zero as you would if you were programming the telephone numbers Note If the Pager ID Number is less than 7 digits it must be prefixed with the digit 6 until the number of digits equals 7 This is only relevant when using the PET format Example If the Pager ID Number is 123456 it must be programmed as 6123456 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 89 Logging System Events Via Serial Printer A ser
103. Mode 4 Hang up the telephone and the system will remain armed If you hear a number of strange sounding tones when the control panel answers the incoming call this means that the system has been programmed for remote programming functions Simply wait for a pause in the tones and follow the steps above to remotely arm the system If the control panel does not answer the call this means that the system may already be armed or remote functions have not been enabled Refer to LOCATION 663 on page 152 to enable remote arming via the telephone Note Where both remote arming and Upload Download have been selected the control panel will answer the call expecting the remote computer This is easily noticed as the modem negotiating tones will be heard rather than the remote arming jingle ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Operations 67 Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module The DTMF Command Module CC886 will allow you to operate the control panel remotely via the telephone line Once a communications link has been established with the control panel you can perform any system functions as you would using the codepad on a touch tone telephone Master Code Functions User Code Functions Installer Code Functions and the ability to enter Installer s Programming Mode to remotely program the control panel are available options that may be performed via the telephone Refer to LOCATION 671
104. NS sorene baeion ahoectiea Ee EEN 35 Arming The System In AWAY Mode AA 35 Forced Arming esu Eege SEENEN EEE Ea ep E EE O EEEa EERE E ERES EEs 35 Disarming The System From AWAY Mode iier e e A S EE O E E E EA E E E G 35 Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 36 Forced Armin e638 sored eyes ah Bi a A eA ER A ea ee a 36 Disarming The System From STAY Mode TL ssc teisstesscescetiesisissecostsvenescedscesces sgeuscgpsesasces svossgubssnsssenscksbepsesscoeacvebeoten 37 Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 sss erneer aeara a E T E didier Eed EE EESE ERE aS Eerst idee SES 38 Forced ANINE ee EE EE EE EE AER 38 Disarming The System From STAY Mode 7 39 Codepad Diiress A latin ss et sensei sect cayhsssbs rT E EEA EE eebe EEES ETEK EEE OEE Er ETE ES REEERE SEn 40 Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 10 130 40 Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 37 Onwards essssessersssssrsereseseesresertesrestertssrerrssertentesrentnseertnsenrnestenese 40 Codepad Fire Alarm Software Version 1 37 Onwards 0 0 0 0 cccesccesscesecesecsseceecaeeeaeceeeeseeeeseeseenseessecsaecsaecnaessaeeaeeeneeegs 40 Codepad Medical Alarm Software Version 131 40 ISOLATING ZONES 5 Sarnen AAR dtocycdeadous ds devechoedleste e dovethorscestnd dg teedblens cetededensdacosactdentvddovbeceivecedl eon 41 Standard solating se eene e eE EEEE vg EE TE EE EE EEE EEEE ER EE E 41 Code To Isolates annii tee EELER me EE EE 41 Fault An lysis Modena meon einn E a T R EAEE EE N E AEE E T
105. On 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 7 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard INSTALLER cone Away How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode Off 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 7 and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard INSTALLER Gong away note To test the on board dialler you will need to program Option 1 Disable Safecom Communication Reporting in LOCATION 896 before you power down the system and re apply the power for the on board dialler to operate or have the base station perform a reframe of the Safecom System After you have successfully tested the reporting of the on board dialler you will need to disable Option 1 in LOCATION 896 and then power down the system or have the base station perform a reframe of the Safecom System Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 50 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Master Code Functions Master Code Functions are designed to allow those users that have the appropriate priority level to perform certain functions of a Supervisory level These functions can only be carried out when the system is in the disarmed state Note The default Master Code is 2 5 8 0 and is known as User Code 1 It is possible for the system to have multiple Master Codes Refer to User Code Priority on page 99 for more information MASTER CODE FUNCTION Away Function Description o Arming and
106. R ES NE E EE 173 Questions To Be Considered When Partitioning eesssesssseeseseesssseeersrsrestsrrssesresresreeresrntssertestesreetsteertereerrssesreeresree 174 Open Close REPOLES Topera seser sa eoe S aee EEE ages E OSes ee TE aE EESE R Eneo Nenne ae aR ENE ie Spears 175 Dialler EE 175 Open Close Reports For Area Tinn i reeree nr a gn A Ge E OE A ERE ee A IR E 176 Open Clos Reports For Area 2 ricis er rera aenor eren ner E E rp EEEE E o EP ss EE ES TE EEE cp ES EErEE aS 176 Open Cl s Reports FOr ATEA ai ee Seege E o e T EN uaaeetaesaees 176 Open Close Reports For Area ee EENS EA she OKEE EA aiT K he OEV EKOE TE EEEE EESE 176 Subscriber ID Number For ATAA l r ALAA AS eae ited See ea ee 177 Subseniber ID Number For Area 2 e r rares aoea rt hess geed va sisadacassqndvsevessiseuabdetecesteassoussesdsaescasy 177 Subscriber LD Number Botter reest reide cugesechcbtactensaecsuncessesprsyedechsbeeveepsadchesseet eensap lees get dee 177 Subscriber ID Number For Area A ue es ineen e iore E SEENEN EE EENEG 177 Zone Allocations jie ek ted ie eee eee Se eee neh Ha ot i aed eae 178 Zone Allocations For Area Tersier ineeie reeter e a a Ea E EE ERENNERT EENEG 178 Zone Allocations OT a a A E A E E NE 178 Zone Allocations For Area 3 reese eo e A WG Rae A Reese 179 Zone Allocations F r Area enee tie E E ee Rela ae ei ae 179 User Code Alloeapong senoressa oaaao rE aae E epr ea OERE SEENE ASEE Ea KEE N gee sb cebacnsoessioesvessoedsenss 180 Setting
107. T Satellite Suen 186 EDMSTU Securitel Interface 186 EDMSTU Securitel Interface A 127 Eight Channel Output Board 0 eee 187 198 Eight Zone Expansion Board 3K3 EOL 187 197 Eight Zone Expansion Board Variable EOL 187 197 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode ee 141 Entry Time siehe EES 140 Entry Time nosis A iin EA S 140 Entry Time 2 050 ssctsscsssjsdssesoettinssscesseassctost oei setot 140 Entry TINE 3 ee secsep sos ecssh oder e detecheleierge Ode 140 Entry Time 4 eo ege EES 140 EOL Resistor Value eee cece ceeeeereeeeeeeeeeereeeeees 112 Event COdES fercis candies oraa sees sae te veces Sege 73 104 Event Mey erer e ed det tne is 47 Event Memory Recall 55 Exit Time AWAY TEE 141 STAY Modelen ee ape tenes 141 STAY ModE 2 E 141 Expansion Board Enable 8 Channel Output Board 163 164 Enable 8 Zone Expansion Board 163 164 F Factory Default sss scsiche isan nan a a 29 FAULT AC Mains bank ge 43 EE 63 Analysis Mode annt a e A 42 Communications Fal 43 D teand KEE 42 Ree E 42 EZ Baul ties sci dscedssanacsds shdevscncnteetuneterdothedtecttnecceesnneetsetes 43 Horn Speake ariin e t ENEE EE 43 Jndteatog necesan nn a 33 34 173 Lime Pak ESE A EEE 43 Low Battery enone a eg 42 Sensor Watch 42 Zone 16 Partitioned ccceeesssesececeeeceesenseeeeeeeees 43 Fire Alaris 5305 sesessssvess cesses E 40 Forced Armng 35 36 38 154 G General Reporting Format 75 H Hand Held Daller T
108. TAY Mode 2 to operate Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 will need to be enabled Refer to the Master Code Function Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 59 for further information on programming zones for STAY Mode 2 Note Single button arming in STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 32 How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 1 Hold down the O button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time for STAY Mode 2 will now commence Any zone that has been programmed for STAY Mode 2 will be automatically isolated and their respective indicators will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the ZONE indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep O If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated It will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed i e If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming To enable forced arming Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 will need to be enabled If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are
109. Upload Download via Alarm Link Software CC816 and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of this setting as long as a communication dialler hybrid has been fitted to the control panel Note If this option has been disabled V2 00 Only it will also disable the control panel from reporting via the Safecom network Disable Dialler Reporting Functions If this option is not enabled the communication dialler will not operate Upload Download via Alarm Link Software CC816 and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of this setting as long as a communication dialler hybrid has been fitted to the control panel Safecom reporting will still function as normal with the dialler disabled 2 Remote Arming Via The Telephone If this option has been enabled you can arm your control panel via a standard telephone using a Phone Controller CC911 Refer to Remote Arming Via The Telephone on page 66 for more information Forced arming is automatically assumed when this feature is being used Refer to Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 for further details on forced arming A communication dialler hybrid must be fitted to the control panel for this feature to operate Whether the reporting functions of the dialler have been enabled or disabled Refer to Option 1 of this location this will have no effect on remote arming via the telephone Refer to Ring Count on page 96 for programming the number of rings before
110. WAY indicators will extinguish INSTALLER cope 2 AWAY No OF DAYS AWAY Note Test reports will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 The number of days decrements by one at 2400 hours as set in LOCATION 901 904 on page 149 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 47 3 Event Memory Recall Mode This feature allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 This function helps with trouble shooting system faults The events are displayed via the codepad indicators How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode 1 Enter your INSTALLER CODE followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard The events will be played back via the ZONE indicators on the codepad in reverse chronological order INSTALLER cope 3 AWAY If the system has been partitioned only the last ten events will be recorded for each of the four areas You will be required to enter this mode at each of the four area codepads Example If the events were as follows Event No Description Of Event System Armed In AWAY Mode Alarm In Zone 3 Alarm In Zone 4 RSC SS System Disarmed Table 15 Event Memory Recall Example Events The event memory playback will report as follows Event No Codepad I
111. a Pager Reporting Format the following programming and hardware options are required 1 The EDM Modem Module CC811 or CC811B will be required to be fitted to the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the control panel Note Some pager companies use the BELL communication frequencies and others use the CCITT frequencies It is important to obtain this information from the pager company so that you can connect the appropriate modem module for the format used Use EDM Modem Module CC811 for Telecom Paging CCITT frequencies and CC811B for BELL frequencies 2 The Primary Telephone Number in LOCATION 000 015 will require the PET Alpha Pager s Access Telephone Number 3 Option 5 Pager Reporting in LOCATION 049 will need to be enabled 4 Option 14 Alpha Pager in LOCATION 050 will need to be enabled 5 LOCATION 514 529 requires the PET Alpha Pager s network password 6 LOCATION 530 539 requires the 7 digit Alpha Pager ID Number Note All Contact ID Event Codes will require any ZERO in the Event Code to be programmed to other than zero If the Event Code has a zero the report for that event will not transmit to the PET Alpha Pager The Solut ion 16 only communicates to the PET Network at the rate of 300 BAUD Telecom Access Telephone Numbers Each state has different access numbers to the PET Network The access telephone numbers to the Telecom Paging Networks for CCITT frequencies are as follows State Access Number
112. afecom Installation Manual Point ID Codes Point ID Event Description Event Code Explanation Page Zone Specific Burglary Zones 1 7 and 9 16 130 Burglary Zone Specific Burglary Zone 8 24 Hour 133 24 Hour Burglary 104 User Specific Open Close 401 Fixed Opening User 120 Closing User User Specific Open Close Partitioned 402 Fixed Opening Group User 175 Closing Group User 030 301 e 031 309 119 mm Duress Alarm 121 Codepad Duress Alam 3 vo 120 117 042 e e 306 119 mm test Repo La pel been LS 045 117 me Fire Atarm 110 Fixed Codepad Fire Alarm New LL e 353 121 mm Dep JL 21 Telephone Line Failure New 2 00 171 050 34d 121 120 120 Table 28 Point ID Codes This table shows the different Point ID Codes and Event Codes that are transmitted to the base station receiver when using Contact ID Reporting Format Some event codes are fixed while others are user definable The event codes that are fixed will always transmit the same code as there are no programming locations made available to alter these The other event codes may be changed when required Example If zone 8 is being used as a 24 hour medical alarm rather than a 24 hour burglary its event code may be changed from Event Code 133 24 Hour Burglary and instead programmed as Event Type 100 Medical Note Before changing any event codes consult your base station supervisor to ensure that you select the correct code
113. al and seal the zones to be tested The codepad will sound a long beep and the horn speaker will sound a short beep every time a zone is sealed or unsealed 3 Press the AWAY button to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE A away ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 57 5 Turning Outputs On and Off If an output has been programmed for remote operation via the telephone or to automatically turn on at a particular time it can be turned on and off using this Master Code Function via the remote codepad over the telephone via the DTMF Command Module or the Alarm Link Software How To Turn An Output ON From The Remote Codepad Enter your MasteR cone followed by 5 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the required OUTPUT no followed by the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the output will now turn on Repeat step 2 if more than one output is required to be turned on Press the away button again to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 5 Awar OUTPUT No AWAY AWAY Output Number 1 Output Event Type 2 8 Refer to page 131 Output Number 2 Output Event Type 2 9 Refer to page 131 Output Number 3 Output Event Type 2 10 Refer to pa
114. and Off New Software Version 1 20 Holding the 4 button down will turn day alarm on or off How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard Day alarm has now been turned on How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Hold down the 4 button until two beeps are heard Day alarm has now been turned off If the STAY indicator is required to indicate the status of day alarm operation enabled disabled refer to LOCATION 669 on page 160 for further information ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 5 System Functions 63 Fault Analysis Mode There are various system faults that can be detected by the control panel When any of these are present the FAULT indicator will begin to flash and the codepad will beep once every minute Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42 for a more detailed description on each fault type How To Determine The Type Of Fault 1 Hold the D button down until two beeps are heard The STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash in unison with the FAULT indicator One or more ZONE indicators 1 8 will illuminate to indicate the type of fault How To Exit Fault Analysis Mode 1 To exit fault analysis mode press the AWAY button The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish Zone Indicator Fault Description 4 Horn Speaker Disconnected 5 zs O Telephone Line Fault E Fault 6 Zone 16 In Alarm Partitioned Systems Only 8 Communications
115. arameter sets the time period for the number of times the zone must trigger before activating an alarm Zone Reporting Information Hundreds Digit The hundreds digit of the Contact ID Event Code is programmed into this location This location is also the Alarm Restore code in all other reporting formats Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 Tens Digit The tens digit of the Contact ID Event Code is programmed into this location This location is the Alarm code in all other reporting formats Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 Units Digit The unit s digit of the Contact ID Event Code is programmed into this location This location is the Channel code that the zone reports on in other reporting formats other than Contact ID Format Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 Dialler Channel This location is factory default to report on dialler channel 1 If the system has been partitioned zones allocated to report on areas other than Area 1 should have their dialler channel correspond to the area number that the zone is allocated to Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 UU OU Oo 0 O OU Zone Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Hundreds Tens Units Dialler Type Option Count Count Time Digit Digit Digit Channel O Zone Defaults Zone 1 Location 340 347 Zone 2 Location 348 355 elebe eeel Zone 3 Location 356 363 Zone 4 Location 364 371 Zone 5 Location 372 379 eehed Eeee elfke Zone 6 Location 380 387 Zone 7 Location 388 395 Zone 8 Loca
116. as been accessed enter command 9 6 D followed by the button This will automatically set the following locations in bold below No other locations will be altered when command 965 has been issued Location Description Setting Location 396 403 12 0 0 0 0 3 3 1 24 Hour Burglary 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 Not Used Table 5 Command 965 Defaults As you can see from the table above all reporting other than zone alarms have been disabled The handshake tone has been set for 1400 Hz tone acknowledgment and the Subscriber ID Number has been set for one identification beep The zone reporting has been set so that any zone that triggers into alarm condition will only report when the alarm occurs the zone restore report will not report as there is no separate indications for zone alarm reports and zone alarm restore reports Note From Software Version 1 30 Command 965 disables zone restore reports Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 28 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Command 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations This command enables or disables the automatic stepping of locations while programming When enabled via the hand held programmer the decimal point of the left most display will reflect the mode of operation If the decimal point is illuminated then auto step mode is active An automatic increment of the location being programmed will occur as soon as
117. at Option Dialling Format Australian DTMF Touch Tone Say International DTMF Touch Tone Australian Decadic Reversed Decadic 10 Minus 1 Alternating DTMF amp Decadic Aust pn Alternating DTMF amp Reversed Decadic Table 43 Dialling Formats Note The alternating sequence is as follows DTMF Decadic DTMF Decadic DTMF Decadic Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 94 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Handshake Tone LOCATION 049 1 This location sets the type of handshake tone required before data transmissions to the monitoring station will begin 1 Hi Lo Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF 2 1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Ademco Lo Speed Format Domestic Dialling Format or Synthesised Voice Formats 3 2300 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in Sescoa Lo Speed Format 4 No Handshake Tone is not recommended 5 Pager Handshake is required when the control panel needs to communicate in Basic Pager Format or PET Alpha Pager Format Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID Format WE No Handshake 2 1400 Hz Lo Speed 5 Pager Handshake Ademco Tx At 1900Hz 3 2300 Hz Lo Speed Sescoa Tx At 1800 Hz Table 44 Handshake Tones Transmission Format LOCATION 0
118. ate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output will reset when the zone has returned to normal This will only occur when the system is disarmed Day Alarm Latching An output that is programmed as Day Alarm Latching will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The ZONE indicator and the latching output will reset when the away button has been pressed This will only occur when the system is disarmed Refer to Output Event Type 0 15 on page 128 for more information If the codepad buzzer has been programmed to operate when a day alarm zone has triggered all relevant zone indicators will flash while the codepad beeps once a second until the away button is pressed ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1 10 How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 7 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Enter your masten cone followed by 7 and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1 20 How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Hold down the 4 button until three beeps are heard How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Hold down the 4 button until two beeps are heard 111 If a zone has been programmed for day alarm the zone can be isolated in the normal way so that it does not register as a day alarm z
119. be Operation Area 2 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Output 11 Location 600 605 oe Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 3 Output 12 E Location 606 611 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Area 3 Output 13 Location 612 617 eh E e Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 4 Output 14 E Location 618 623 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Area 4 125 ISSUE222 DOC 126 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer Multiple output event types can be directed to the codepad buzzer so that it may be used to indicate any number of events This is achieved by selecting an output and programming it for the required output event type When you are satisfied that the output is functioning correctly change the first digit of the output event type i e The tens digit by adding the value 8 Example 3 0 Communications Failure This event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver It will reset when the first Kiss Off is received This output event type is not applicable to domestic or voice reporting To redirect the above output event type to operate a codepad buzzer program the output event type as below LJO Communication
120. ber If a busy or engaged tone has been detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the second telephone number if one is programmed The first call however will be counted as one unsuccessful dialling attempt If the second telephone number is also busy or an engaged tone is detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the third telephone number if one is programmed If a busy tone is not detected the control panel will assume that the phone has been answered and will begin sending its transmission The transmission consists of a siren tone followed by a unit identification beep The identification beep will allow the customer to verify which control panel made the call if more than one control panel is reporting to the same telephone number The identification beep is programmed in LOCATION 55 of the Subscriber ID Number Note A maximum of 6 calls per alarm event will be made when the control panel has been set up for Domestic Dialling Format This count includes any unsuccessful calls The counter will be reset if the zone retriggers and a further 6 attempts will be made The control panel will stop dialling after 6 attempts or 3 successful calls The control panel will also stop dialling if a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad Acknowledge Domestic Dialling Once the call has been received if it is not acknowledged using a Phone Controller CC911 the control panel will continue to
121. ble 29 General Reporting Formats Restore Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC He Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Code Description Code Description SSS Subscriber ID Number AlarmRestoreCode en Channel Number Be Bypass Restore Code SS CO o zoe O O o o f ee PAC Fe Restore Code di SS PB Bypass lb Low Battery Restore Code 1 Digt CG A AC Fall Code 2 Digit D Duress Code D L tow Banery Code pa Dy Duress Code Digit Py Low Battery Code 2 Digit LE Panic Code Da o flon ooo To U User Number Table 30 3 1 4 1 Transmission Code Descriptions ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 77 Securitel The Solut ion 16 control panel can communicate to base stations via the Securitel Network using an EDMSTU CS800 Not all messages can be transmitted via securitel as they can via the communication dialler transmitting in Contact ID Format Refer to Table 31 Securitel Reporting Messages below for the list of messages that are supported by securitel Event Location Page No 120 Table 31 Securitel Reporting Messages Note Zone bypass and zone trouble reports are not transmitted separately They are transmitted as one combined isolate report How To Program and Set Up Securitel To connect and set up the EDMSTU follow the procedures below Program the Subscriber ID Number in LOCATION 052 05
122. ble 97 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Locations V1 40 This location determines the amount of times the sirens can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout siren for this location to be effective Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the sirens is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 662 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler LOCATION 757 0 Location Description 757 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler 0 15 Table 98 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler Locations V1 40 This location determines the amount of times the dialler can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout dialler for this location to be effective
123. by the button Two beeps will be heard Example A in the display indicates the zone is triggered A blank display indicates the zone is normal Ste 4 indicates that zones 1 2 3 and 4 are triggered A flashing 4 indicates zones 9 10 11 and 12 are being displayed D 8 X indicates that zones 5 and 8 are triggered A flashing 8 indicates zones 13 and 16 are being displayed Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 24 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Command 959 Test Programming Key This command causes a test to be carried out on the programming key This test is non destructive and any data in the programming key will remain intact after the test has been completed One long beep indicates that the programming key has failed and three beeps indicate a successful test If the programming key has been removed before the test has completed or the programming key has failed the data in the programming key has become corrupt Remember do not remove the programming key while the activity LED is illuminated constantly or pulsing rapidly How To Test The Programming Key 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode 2 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel 3 Enter command 9 5 D followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming key has now been tested 4 Enter command 9 6 O followed by the button to exit th
124. cavscssesecetsensotcaveas seta easosasavessgedsonssghsgeeat ea tacnanssavensteotaeeaoeas 134 S Normally Low Goin Openers eege eee sev sabesecesds Seegen STEE seul tees bomiaak eee 135 H Normally Low Pulsing Openie srein bcs cues banned EE EE TEE EE AE EEE EEEE EEEE ES EESE 135 10 Normally Low One Shot Open 135 11 Normally Low One Shot Open With Retrigger 00 0 eee cee csecseecneeeseseeeeeseeeeeseseseseeeessesseeseenseesseseneeees 135 12 Normally Low One Shot Open With Reset eee eecesecesecssecsseceeecaeecseeeseseseeseeeeseaeseeeseeeeseesseeesaecsaecseeeas 135 13 Normally Low One Shot Open With Alarm 135 14 Normally Low Latching Open 135 Output Polarity Software Version 1 10 Only 135 Dog Of Outputs eeng ENEE ENEE ENEE ESE ENEE SO PAPERS EEEa 136 P lsing POlArIt E 136 OneShot Pol rities soi eege 137 SYSTEM EVENT TIMERS or ane nE E EES AE EENS 140 How To Program Entry Exit Tmes eee r a A E E E A E NE E s 140 te ai E 140 Entity TIME EE 140 Enty TIME eet ee EE EA EE E EAEE EAE ES E EE TEE A S E E EEEE ES 140 Entry EL EE 140 Le EE 140 Exit ime TE 141 Exit Time For AWAY Mode 200 141 Exit Time For STAY Mode Lorren ENEE ee a i eas 141 Exit Time For STA Y Mode rare rer erae a Eear ts Ea E EE EaD OEE Ea EO E S TSE DESSES EEN 141 Entry Guard Time Pot STAY Mode a a a a era araa E a EEE E En E A SEENE Seh 141 Codepad Lockout TIME rninn resa wos oie E E duke vu E EEEE E EE e EEEE E E A s Ein 142 Sensor Watch Time ihein e a ae
125. chine or facsimile from answering the call Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 153 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed 2 From Software Version 1 37 Programming a 14 as the ring count will enable Answering Machine Bypass in the secondary mode In this mode when calling the control panel allow the phone to ring for no more than 2 rings and then hang up Wait a minimum of 8 seconds before calling the control panel again The control panel will now answer on the first ring If you don t wait the 8 seconds the control panel will not answer the call Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 153 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed Note You should set the ring count on the answering machine or facsimile machine to be higher than two rings Four or six rings would be preferred ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Access Codes 98 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Access Codes This section describes the access codes that are used to assign privileges and access functions for user code holders of the system Three types of user codes exist within the system the Installer Code User Codes and Auxiliary Codes Each of these codes allow specific access and operation of the varied functions of the control panel Installer Code LOCATION 56 62 1234 This code is used to access the Installer s Programming Mode and can be between
126. cleared when the system has been disarmed The bypass code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Formats It has no effect on Contact ID Format as a zone bypass will always be reported on event code 570 A Zone Bypass report will be transmitted on which ever dialler channel the respective zone has been allocated to when the system has been partitioned Note If Zone Bypass reports are not required program LOCATION 468 471 with a zero Zone Bypass Reports 9 16 LOCATION 470 471 99 Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 56 Zone Bypass Codes For Zones 9 16 Refer to Zone Bypass Reports 1 8 for more information ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 115 Zone Trouble Report 1 8 LOCATION 472 473 99 Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 57 Zone Trouble Codes For Zones 1 8 A zone is in trouble when it is unsealed at the end of exit time A Sensor Trouble report Contact ID Event Code 380 will be transmitted to indicate that one or more zones have been automatically isolated by the system 24 hour zones that are unsealed at the end of exit time will not transmit a Sensor Trouble report as the restore for that zone is still outstanding A Sensor Trouble restore report will be transmitted for burglary zones when the zone reseals o
127. d to the control panel and lock them out for the time period programmed in LOCATION 640 641 on page 142 3 Transmit an Access Denied Contact ID Event Code 421 report to the base station receiver Refer to LOCATION 484 487 on page 118 for more information Each time the system is armed or disarmed the counter is reset The number of attempts can be anywhere between 1 15 If you program a zero into this location the code attempts are unlimited and neither of the three points listed above will take place This function works when the system is in the armed or disarmed state Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 102 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming 104 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Zone Programming Each zone contains eight locations that are divided into two groups of four The first four locations determine how the zone operates while the second four locations contain the dialler reporting information Zone Operating Information Zone Type This location programs the Zone Type required eg Delay 1 Instant 24 Hour etc Zone Option This location controls the zone eg Lockout Siren Silent etc Zone Pulse Count This location sets how many times the zone must trigger within the time specified in the Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time This p
128. de 1 or STAY Mode 2 Indicator Definition fr On O System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Off System Is Not Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Flashing System Is In ISOLATE Mode Or STAY Mode 2 Zones Are Being Programmed Table 8 STAY Indicator Functions ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 33 MAINS Indicator The MAINS indicator is used to indicate that the systems AC mains power is normal or has failed Indicator Definition Po On AC Mains Power Normal Flashing AC Mains Failure Table 9 MAINS Indicator Function FAULT Indicator The FAULT indicator is used to indicate that the system has detected a system fault Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 42 for more details on system faults Indicator Definition Ir On O OE There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified Off The System Is Normal There Are No Faults Flashing There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 10 FAULT Indicator Functions Audible Indicators In general the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows Indicator Definition Exit Time In STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 One Long Beep Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted Automatic Arming Takes Place One Short Beep Every Minute There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 11 Audible Indications El
129. dex 16 Zone LED Codepad AAA 188 2 Channel Radio Interface RPOOS 189 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface 189 8 Channel Output Board eee cseeceeeeeeeees 187 8 Zone Area Codepad A 188 8 Zone Expansion Board OK 187 8 Zone Expansion Board Variable eeeeeeee 187 8 Zone LED Codepad AAA 187 8 Zone Master Partitioned Codepad 1 0 0 0 eee 188 Cellular Dialer pcnn dE EENS 188 Codepad Mimic Board 189 Daller Amplier Lead 187 Direct Link Cable iscsi eee eeeeseeeceessececeseeeceenseeeeeeenee 187 EDMS ITU ss ish tenia ie a ee 186 Hand Held Daller Tester e eee eeeeeeceeenseeeeeenee 188 Hand Held Programmer 186 JP5 Terminal Block AA 187 Modem Module 186 Night Arm Station senenn n r 188 Phone Controller essri a en 188 Programming Ren 186 PS100 Power Supply sssesssesssesesssssesserssessersereseseese 188 Radio Key Keyswitch Interface 189 Relay Output Interface 189 Satelite Zeiten See 186 Telephone Line Fault Module A 187 TROOS Plug E 188 Voice Medl l eesizegeeedbedear n es eaa ERa 186 DEE eet 125 O tput TO siete os e eet eel een es 125 Em We EE AES ESETET 125 Output 2an a a iee aea a ies 125 Output TS ienen ne e E ee 125 Output TA EE 125 DE Zeria r Deon E desen E 125 QUUPUE E 125 Output E 125 put KEE 125 Oui EE 125 Outp t To 2s reirei idene epeei ieies 125 Re LEE 125 QU Le 125 Output Event Type e EE 128 AC Mains 60 Hz Or 50 Ha 132 Alarm In AWAY Mode 130 Alarm In STAY Mode essecc
130. dicator to indicate successful entry into any programming mode For example this will occur when entering the Installer s Programming Mode Operating Codepads In Partitioning Operating From A CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepad If you have a partitioned system with CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads installed the operating procedure is exactly the same as described throughout this manual Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 to determine which area a particular codepad belongs Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad If you have a partitioned system with a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad installed the operating procedure is the same as described throughout this manual with one exception All operations are relative to the area whose AREA DISPLAY indicator is illuminated at the time Example If the AREA DISPLAY indicator number 2 is illuminated all operations performed will only affect Area 2 To perform any operations in another area you will have to move the AREA DISPLAY indicator to the desired area To Move From One Area To The Next 1 Press the AWAY button The area display indicator will move to the next area 2 Press the AWAY button again The area display indicator will move to the next area Securitel and Partitioning The EDMSTU was not designed to send individual Open Close reports for each area via the Securitel Network It will however send first to open and last to clos
131. different control panels calling the same telephone number Ring Count LOCATION 063 8 This location sets the number of rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call This should be set at an acceptable level bearing in mind that one ring Ring Ring Ring Ring and that a ring count of 10 represents approximately 60 seconds This location only has an effect if remote arming and or remote Upload Download via Alarm Link Software have been programmed If this location is programmed as zero then the answering of incoming calls will be disabled Answering Machine Bypass Answering machine bypass has been incorporated so that it is possible to make a connection with the control panel for remote arming or Upload Download when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine on the same telephone line There are two different methods of using answering machine bypass as explained below The secondary method should only be used when there is a large amount of traffic on the line eg A home office It will reduce the chance of the control panel incorrectly answering incoming calls 1 Programming the ring count as 15 will enable Answering Machine Bypass in the primary mode When calling the control panel let the phone ring for no more than 4 rings and then hang up If you call again within 45 seconds the control panel will answer the call on the first ring and the connection will be established This will prevent the answering ma
132. e STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will disarm Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm Area 4 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm only Area 4 when the system has been partitioned via the JP5 pins EXP and GND Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Disarm Area 4 A momentary keyswitch may be used to disarm only Area 4 when the system has been partitioned via the JP5 pins EXP and GND Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm Disarm Area 4 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm Area 4 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND when the system has been partitioned If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 has been enabled the horn speaker will give identification beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that Area 4 has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that Area 4 has been armed in AWAY Mode Latching Arm Disarm Area 4 A toggle or latching keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm Area 4 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND when the system has been partitioned If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 has been enabled the horn speaker will give identification beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that Area 4 has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that Area 4 has been armed in AWAY Mode
133. e away button to disable domestic dialling MASTER CODE 2 away sTaY J away Indicators For Changing Phone Numbers Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Table 20 Indicators For Changing Phone Numbers ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 55 3 Event Memory Recall Mode This feature allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the STAY or AWAY Modes This function helps with trouble shooting system faults The events are displayed via the codepad indicators How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode 1 Enter your masten cone followed by 3 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard The events will be played back via the ZONE indicators on the codepad in reverse chronological order MASTER CODE 3 away If the system has been partitioned only the last ten events will be recorded for each of the four areas You will be required to enter this mode at each of the four areas Example If the events were as follows Event No Description Of Event System Armed In AWAY Mode Alarm In Zone 3 Alarm In Zone 4 a Sa System Disarmed Table 21 Event Memory Recall Example Events The
134. e Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key How To Test The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held programmer make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position 2 Enter the Installer s Programming Mode 3 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 9 5 D followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming key connected to the hand held programmer has now been tested pi Enter command 9 6 Q followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode 6 Leave the switch on the hand held programmer in the EXT position and disconnect the external programming key Command 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode This command is used to exit the Installer s Programming Mode after you complete your programming alterations This is achieved by entering command 9 6 O followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to normal This command can be performed at any programming stage and from any location Command 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings This command will reset the control panel back to the factory default values Refer to the values shown throughout this manual or the Programming Sheets on page 211 This is achieved by entering the command 961 followed by the button Three beeps will be heard ISSUE
135. e Location 846 Location 847 Location 846 847 V2 05 Ring Burst Time Location 846 Location 847 Location 896 V2 00 Safecom Reporting Options Increments Of 5 ms Increments Of 80 ms Increments Of 5 ms Increments Of 80 ms 1 Safecom Communication Reporting Disabled 2 Arming From ST1000 Base Allowed 4 Disarming From ST1000 Base Allowed 8 Reserved Location 897 V1 37 Page 167 System 0 tions 5 1 Send Test Report At End Of Siren Time y p 2 Power Up In Disarmed State Re Boot 4 Internal Crystal To Keep Time V1 40 8 Reserved Location 898 V1 33 EE EE Page 168 System Options 6 1 Busy Tone Detection For Domestic Dialling 2 Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Dialling 4 Extend Acknowledge Tone Detection From 30 60 Seconds H 8 If Battery Failed Restrict Battery Test Only On Arming V1 35 Location 899 Page 169 Carrier Sync Options T 100 ms 9 900 ms 2 200 ms 10 1 Second 3 300 ms 11 1 1 Seconds 4 400 ms 12 1 2 Seconds 5 500 ms 13 1 3 Seconds 6 600 ms 14 1 4 Seconds 7 700 ms 15 1 5 Seconds 8 800 ms Disable Factory Default 0 Defaulting System Allowed 15 Defaulting System Disabled H Location 901 904 Page 149 System Time Location 901 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Location 902 Hour Of The Day Units Digit Location 903 Minute Of The Day Tens Digit DD Location 904 Minute Of The Day Units Digit ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limi
136. e burglar and eliminate the possibility of the burglar answering the call As you can see our method of anti jamming will in the worst possible case delay the alarm signal by ninety seconds but even more importantly will never allow for an audio connection between the burglar and the control panel All dialling products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited have incorporated this true anti jamming feature as standard since 1985 and we do not consider it as an option but a must in any professional security system True anti jamming can only be found in products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited and any other manufacturer can only offer second best due to our patent on this very unique and effective procedure ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Appendices 207 Appendix B Test Reports Only When Armed The Solut ion 16 control panel allows for test reports to be transmitted to the base station receiver to verify that the dialler functional So what you might say as most alarm diallers allow you to do this The one problem with this is that installations that report opening and closing reports will generally also transmit a test report each day This call is unnecessary as a successful opening and closing report means that the dialler is functioning correctly The Solut ion 16 control panel allows you to save time and money by providing test reports only while the sys
137. e control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call you will hear a short jingle 2 After the jingle press the corresponding area number that you wish to establish a communication link with i e 1 2 3 or 4 You will now hear a second jingle and have established a communication link Once a communication link has been established with a partitioned control panel you cannot toggle from area to area like you can on a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad To access another area you will need to terminate the communication link redial the control panel and then select the required area You can arm and disarm all areas at the same time when linked to a partitioned control panel provided that the user code is valid for all areas and that Option 1 Enable User Code 0 AWAY Function To Arm Disarm All Areas has been enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 161 Once connected any normal system function can be performed by simply entering the numbers on the telephone as you would from a codepad HOLD DOWN FUNCTIONS however will not work While you are connected to the control panel if a button is not pressed within a sixty second period you will hear a jingle of decreasing pitch that will indicate that the link has been terminated To Terminate The Communication Link With Your Control Panel 1 Press the button on the telephone twice to terminate the communication link You will hear a short jingle of decreas
138. e default button Program a 15 into LOCATION 900 Release the default button Exit Installer s Programming Mode GV NN A Oe ES Defaulting The Control Panel If the Solut ion 16 control panel does not have LOCATION 900 programmed as 15 follow the procedure outlined below to successfully default the control panel back to the factory default settings How To Default The Control Panel 1 Disconnect the AC mains and backup battery from the control panel 2 Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button located at the top of the printed circuit board 3 Reconnect the AC mains to the control panel 4 After reconnecting the AC mains wait for 3 5 seconds before releasing the DEFAULT button You will hear the dialler seize relay RL2 on the control panel click once and two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad The control panel will now need to be disarmed by using the default Master Code 2580 The control panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default settings Note If following the above procedure to default the control panel and you hear the dialler seize relay RL2 click four times defaulting the control panel has been disabled The control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited for exchange where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 30 Solution 16 S
139. e dialling sequence will be terminated when a zero appears Example To program the number 9 672 1055 completely you would program 96721 1045 50 Programming A Four Second Pause In The Phone Number To enter a four second pause in the dialling sequence you would need to program the value 13 This may be necessary when the dialler is communicating through an old slower telephone exchange or where a PABX system is in place Example To program the number 02 pause 9 672 1055 you would program 102 s 6721 10 f5 50 Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program po Break LD bee aS Table 42 Dialling Digits LOCATION 000 015 0000000000000000 When the control panel has triggered the control panel will dial this number in an attempt to contact the monitoring station pager etc If the call is successful the relevant information will be transmitted and the dialler will return back to the stand by mode If unsuccessful the dialler will try twice more using the Primary Telephone Number after which the Secondary Telephone Number will be called three times This procedure will be repeated only once again i e Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm after ten minutes if none of the first six attempts were successful Note When programming the telephone number if a 0 is required it must be programmed as a 10 Please contact your monitoring station or Pager Company for the relevant telephone numbers befo
140. e next area display Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 Holding the istay J button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 1 Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 will need to be enabled for this function to operate If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle holding the LSTAYJ button down a second time will disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has been triggered a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system If the system has been partitioned holding down the LSTAYJ button on the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad will only arm the area that the codepad belongs to in STAY Mode 1 This function does not operate on the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 Holding the O button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 2 Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 will need to be enabled for this function to operate If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle holding the O button down again until two beeps are heard will disarm the system Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has been triggered a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system STAY Mode 2 is no
141. e number Q is added to the end of any valid user code that is being used to disarm the system A duress alarm is always silent and can only be made use of if your system is reporting back to a monitoring station or pocket pager cove 9 away Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 10 1 36 A codepad panic alarm will be triggered when any two outside buttons in the same horizontal row on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 4 in LOCATION 666 on page 155 to enable codepad panic to be silent say away 1 34 4 6 4 7 9 Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 37 A codepad panic alarm will be triggered when either the 1 and 3 buttons or the s and away buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 4 in LOCATION 666 on page 155 to enable codepad panic to be silent UNE CHEF AWAY Codepad Fire Alarm Software Version 1 37 A codepad fire alarm will be triggered when the 4 and D buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm A distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition The fire sound is different to the burglary sound 4 6 Codepad Medical Alarm Software Version 1 37 A codepad medical alarm will be triggered when the 7 and H buttons on the codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm 7 9 Note To disable
142. e reports if Option 2 in LOCATION 664 has been enabled Refer to Table 31 Securitel Reporting Messages on page 77 for the list of reports that can be transmitted via the Securitel Network Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 174 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Questions To Be Considered When Partitioning When programming a So lut ion 16 control panel for partitioning there are a few steps that need to be considered 1 How many areas do you need 2 What zones will be common to what areas 3 Does each area need to send individual open and close reports or 4 Will first to open and last to close reports be sufficient 5 Is your base station running Sims 1 or Sims 2 software 6 If the base station is running Sims 1 software and you want to send individual open and close reports for each area you will need to allocate a separate Subscriber ID Number for each area Sims 2 software will accept multiple open and close reports on the same Subscriber ID Number 7 Does each area need its own different entry delay time 8 Does each area need its own individual codepad 9 Does each area need its own individual siren and strobe 10 What areas is each user allowed access to ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 175 Open Close Reports The following options are related to Open Close reports You can select one two or all th
143. e state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement of the trademark Notice of Liability While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document neither Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited nor any of its official representatives shall have any liability to any person or entity with respect to any liability loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this book Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited reserves the right to make changes to features and specifications at any time without prior notification in the interest of ongoing product development and improvement Table Of Contents INTRODUCTION ge ahi Daer ee te 14 QUICK START sss sieht ets cs tiene oops tacks enee Zeeche EERSTEN RAR 15 RE Ed OC IR bei L H EE 16 PROGRAMMING E 18 PROGRAMMING WITH THE REMOTE CODEPAD 000 ceeeeeceeceseeeecensecnsecsecaecnaecsaecseecaeesaeseaeeeaeeesesesnssenseenaes 19 PROGRAMMING WITH THE HAND HELD PROGRAMMER AAA 20 PROGRAMMING USING THE PROGRAMMING KEY AAA 21 PROGRAMMING VIA THE DTMF COMMAND MODULE AAA 22 How To Establish A Communication Link With The Control Dance 22 Programming The Control Panel Once A Communication Link Has Been Established AAA 22 PROGRAMMING OPTION BIS EERSTEN es sbeubausessbeben NEESS EENS ENEE dee 22 INSTALLERS PROGRAMMING COMMANDS rrie e A E E E
144. e used with this board Refer to LOCATION 672 on page 163 to enable this zone expansion board Eight Zone Expansion Board Variable EOL CC883 This eight zone expansion board provides terminations for zones 9 16 when the configuration of split EOL resistors is not suitable This board is supplied with different value EOL hybrids for the available resistors that may be used There is no longer a need to replace the EOL resistor when replacing an existing control panel with a Solut ion 16 Refer to LOCATION 672 on page 163 to enable this zone expansion board Termination Block For J P5 Pins CC882 This termination block provides two terminals when using the JPS pins EXP and GND for keyswitch operation for arming and disarming the system Refer to Options 3 12 in LOCATION 672 on page 163 for more information CP5 Eight Zone Codepad CP508 This codepad is designed to operate with the So lut ion range of control panels It provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad cannot be used with any system that has been partitioned Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 188 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual CP5 Sixteen Zone Codepad CP516 This codepad is designed to operate with the S o lut ion range of control panels It provides indications for up to 16 zones This codepad cannot be used with any system that has been partitioned CP5 Area Addressable Codepad CP500A This codepad
145. ecause the Solution 16 control panel does not have a 2 wire to 4 wire converter the control panel must stop sending its carrier to the remote modem when it receives data When it is time to send data again it reapplies the carrier before sending data Some modems unfortunately do not synchronise as quickly as other modems Remember a modem must be synchronised before receiving data The time it takes a modem to sync varies from modem to modem Some modems may only want a carrier for 100 ms while others may require a carrier for 900 ms LOCATION 899 specifies in units of 100 ms how long the Solut ion 16 control panel should apply a carrier before commencing data transmissions Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 170 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 172 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Partitioning Partitioning allows a single control panel to act as if it were four different control panels There is a CP5 Master Partitioned CPSOOP codepad that has indicators to show the status of all areas individually If you wish to allocate each area a separate codepad the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad must be used This will give the user the impression that they are the only operator of the system eege Solution Solucion 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 C 9 E E E E Zon m 3
146. ecsaecsaecsaecsaecsaeeaeseaeseaeeeeeeaeenaeesaecsaessaecsaesaaeees 200 Solution 16 Safecom Intertace 2 2 ssssscessass eacsecssebeeesdes ENEE ESA ES EErEE Sr E Er EEE ae 202 How To Install The BNC Fitting est ee ite ee 202 How To Mount The Radios 2 53 52 esas Sara ies SA Beet Eege REESEN 203 Mounting The Radio Aeddi Re Se E 203 Telecom Connection Diagrams 5 s 3 s esscssecsestcsskssisthsdhasenates seess Eps ea OERE SE OSEE e EREE E s Eh son sedoass oS Aap EEN E ee 204 VaN ed sd BAI D D Oa CERERE ET A EAE 206 Telephone ue EE EE 206 APPENDIX EE 207 Test Reports Only When Armed A 207 WARRANTY STATEMENT 3 te enee BA BAS Sieh ahs i AS Rg IE Sean eis 210 SPCC CATIONS nsis orre capes sebestl ab eg Shes shee EEEE EEEE E E OSEI RE Ea ES EE E RE R Er EE E aS 210 Software Version Number enon n EE See E E A EAS ees 210 Introduction 14 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Introduction Congratulations on selecting the So lut ion 16 control panel for your installation So that you can obtain the most from your unit we suggest that you take the time to read through this manual and familiarise yourself with the numerous outstanding operating and installation features of this control panel You will notice that in all aspects of planning engineering styling operation convenience and adaptability we have sought to anticipate your every possible requirement Programming simplicity and speed have been some of the major consid
147. ect an incoming call Always program the ring burst time less than the duration of the ring tone Note These locations are factory set and should not be changed unless required Ring Burst Time LOCATION 846 847 46 Location Description Increments Of 5 ms Increments Of 80 ms Table 100 Ring Burst Time Locations V2 05 These locations program the ring burst time Default 500 ms If the duration of the telephone ring tone is 1 5 seconds programming the ring burst time more than the telephone ring duration 1 5 seconds the control panel will not detect an incoming call Always program the ring burst time less than the duration of the ring tone Note These locations are factory set and should not be changed unless required ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 149 System Time LOCATION 901 904 0000 Location Description Current Hour In 24 Hour Time Tens Digit Current Minute Tens Digit Current Minute Units Digit Current Hour In 24 Hour Time Units Digit Table 101 System Time Locations The Solut ion 16 control panel has a real time 24 hour clock that needs to be set during installation Setting The Date and Time This function needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the system has been powered down How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your MASTER cone followed by 6 andthe AWAY J button Three beeps will be hea
148. ectronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 34 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual LCD Codepad Indicators The LCD fixed icon codepads provide full zone status indication at all times as well as a number of special icons which indicate such things as system armed system disarmed mains fail system fault and other system functions The following table outlines all of the indicators that will be found on the CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad CP508L and the CPS5 Sixteen Zone LCD Codepad CP516L Zone Indicators 123 Mains Indicator Armed In AWAY Mode QA Armed In STAY Mode A System Disarmed A Zone Isolating Mode A Fault Indicator A Programming Mode AA Flashing Off Indicator Zone Sealed On Indicator Zone In Alarm ISSUE222 DOC The ZONE indicators 1 8 on CP508L and 1 16 on CP516L show the status of each zone Illuminated Zone Unsealed Flashing Zone In Alarm Off Zone Sealed The MAINS icon indicates the status of the AC mains power supply Illuminated AC Mains OK Flashing AC Mains Disconnected Or Fail The AWAY icon illuminates when the system is armed in the AWAY mode The indicator will also illuminate when the system is armed in the AWAY mode The STAY icon illuminates when the system is armed in the STAY mode The and indicators will also illuminate when the system is armed in the STAY mode This icon will illuminate wh
149. ed such as lightning excessive voltage mechanical shock or damage arising out of abuse alteration or improper application of the equipment Specifications Temperature Range 0 45 Degrees Celsius Humidity 10 95 Power Source TFO008 Plug Pack 240 Volt 18 Volt AC 1 3 Amp Stand By Current 65 ma Current Draw In Alarm Condition 115 ma Current Draw With No Alarm and Codepad Fitted 105 ma Back Up Battery 6 5 Ah 12 Volt DC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery Dimensions 306 mm x 262 mm x 84 mm Packed In Carton Weight 2 5 Kg Austel Approval Number A94 02B 0476 Only With TF008 Plug Pack New Zealand Telepermit PTC 211 95 246 Software Version Number LOCATION 999 1 40 When using the Hand Held Programmer CC814 you have the ability to display the software version number of the control panel Refer to Command 999 Display Software Version Number on page 28 for more information ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets 212 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Location 000 015 Primary Telephone Number Location 016 031 Secondary Telephone Number Location 032 047 Callback Telephone Number Page 92 Location 048 Dialling Format Location 049 Handshake Tone Location 050 Transmission Format Location 051 Transmission Speed Location 052 055 Subscriber ID Number s 2 Australian DTMF Australian Decadic
150. ed 5 Rs Area 3 Is Armed Area 2 Is Armed 5 9 Area 4 Is Armed These outputs will operate once their corresponding area has been armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 The output will reset once the corresponding area has been disarmed Example If Area 1 has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Output Event Type 5 6 will activate The output will reset once Area 1 has been disarmed Area 1 Is Disarmed 5 o Area 3 Is Disarmed Area 2 Is Disarmed 5 j Area 4 Is Disarmed These outputs will operate once their corresponding area has been disarmed The output will reset once the corresponding area has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Example If Area 1 has been disarmed Output Event Type 5 10 will operate If Area 1 has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 the output will reset Any Areas Armed 5 s5 Any Areas Disarmed Output Event Type 5 14 will operate when any area becomes armed if the control panel has been partitioned The output will reset when all areas have been disarmed Output Event Type 5 15 will operate when any area becomes disarmed if the control panel has been partitioned The output will reset when all areas have been armed Area 1 Codepad Data 6 A Area 3 Codepad Data Area 2 Codepad Data 6 d 3 Area 4 Codepad Data If the control panel has been partitioned CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads are required to be connected to separate outputs and programmed for the required area that the codepad belongs to
151. ed ee E 101 AUxilary Code EE 101 Code Rees e noisier nie ol aoe eel baat Melis el ie Rees ets Dele el eee Bs 101 ZONE PROGRAMMING eneen as ee eh eee Aa i ea a bie Ae eae HO Ee 104 Zone Operating Informations EES oeer p iS E e es EEN KEEN E E EEE EENS os T ER ES EEEE REES 104 Zone Reporting Information ss saren a n E E E R A E E N SEE 104 Zone Defaults tise steed ene nea WD at oes ae Shae oh ieee eh LAN un ee Gael Saas ha a eects 104 ZONED RE E 105 H Instant eessen EE EES cov sb sous cdsestdeeeahsobsenseghesvsbs toeseacostesessedanessbsentieds 105 I Ha ndoyer ZONE es enee eege Sde iere dere dd eege Ge iert su ies ee Eere E o S A EEs eNe Ep S E EEES eis 105 2 Delay 1 Zone EELER EE eel EEE E NEE ees ESS 105 3 KEE 105 4 Del y 3 EE 105 S DIE ea EE 105 6 Instant Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 105 7 Handover Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 105 8 Delay 1 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 105 H Delay 2 Zone Isolated In STAY Model estiioge usdeg dd NEE 106 10 Delay 3 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 106 11 Delay 4 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 106 12 24 Hour Burglary Zone scsssesescsssesscssssescestecuat ge sssascssacesacesscedssnscgsssevsednsacdsessssonstenbssnsegtasevss S OP SEEE SEEE REEVES oS 106 13 24 HOUT Fire ZONE eree aeoe ere Eaa e EEEE E EREE edd E E E sesand ege dE N ce EEO E SEE EENE T SENEE ERE 106 14 Chime Zone Follow M E E E eld ini Ee ae 106 15 Zone Not Heer ck cess n te Ga a ee EEN ave athens a a a
152. eee eeseceeeeeneeeeeee 104 Trouble Report 115 AD EE EE ee 104 105 Zone 16 Partitioned Svstems 43 Zone Options Lockout Diallet is speissi ern ipress 107 Lock t Sit M sssini oerein ioie eiS 107 Sensor Watch 290 108 Silent Alarm eeose ainsi rer EES EES 107 Zone Status Modere ie e EE AS 23 Zone Type 24 Hour Burglary rennen r a ai 106 24 Hour Hre eo e A T ERE N 106 Chime eines iosian o Ee TEE 106 Delay ce ie ee 105 Delay 1 Isolated In STAY 1 105 Dela EE 105 Delay 2 Isolated In STAY 1 106 Delen Ee 105 Delay 3 Isolated In STAY 1 106 Delay A sce scscssva continues a e a E N 105 Delay 4 Isolated In STAY 1 106 SE neredne e r RAR 105 Handover Isolated In STAY TN 105 SE ege aeoea ea aa e ia 105 Instant Isolated In STAY TL 105 Not DE WEE 106 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index 229 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 25 Huntingwood Drive A C N 002 907 271 Huntingwood NSW 2148 Australia Phone 612 9672 1777 Facsimile 612 9672 1717 email edm edm com au
153. eeseeenes 211 PS100 Power Supply Module 188 Pulse C te toene chante noss 108 SEN E 156 TAINS is sisk sees aar eener Eeer 109 Q QUICK Start EE 15 R Radio Key Keyswitch Interface 189 eA miD O a EEE ET T 189 Enable poteo neeese aeree e p eaire Sid 155 Receivers and Their Formats ec eceeseeseeeeeseeeeees 95 Remote Operations Arming Via Telephone 66 152 DTMF Command Module Operations ssssesseseeeeeee 67 Upioad Download A 69 Reporting Formats 3 1 Format 20010 75 4t Form t eses iirin reei 75 SE Formatii seet ae E EE 75 Basics Pager PEE E EE ed eege ee E 84 Contact ID nies ite La OR ee 72 Ee 78 PET Alpha Pager heretes inerea 85 Sec ritel EE 77 Synthesised Voice Renortng cee eeseeseeeereeees 80 Resistor Valte 8 scspsssssevsteoescseeseetesensszsbes ENEE 112 RE bal egre deser deefe 121 RF Jammin 8 e Eed EECH 121 RF Jamming Delai 142 RF Supervision Time 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeceecnseeneeeaee 142 Ring Burst TIME 26 ecocvenscosss ce ietsie eieiei 148 Rin Counts sda hits Se ee ie ele 96 A Safecom Interfac 2 eiei erie eree ae eer Eai ai 202 Remote Arming Via ST1000 Base 167 Remote Disarming Via ST1000 Base eee 167 RE Pails ci See ete ites eS eer 121 RFE Jammin tege EES 121 RF Jamming Dean 142 RF Supervision Time 00 0 0 eee cee eeseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 142 Telco ad Eet 121 Satellite Siren ss lt tc ee tistical sees 127 186 Service Mode srono n A bine seusentorsssaeeeeeuonetes 48 Secondary Telephone Number
154. eessececeeceeeeesseeeeeeseee 130 Any Areas Armed scssccsssecesecsseescnsecsseeesonseonnees 133 Any Areas Disarmed un 133 Area Codepad Data 133 Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed 132 Area 1 In Alarm AEN 132 Area T Is Armed ee EEOEERE cachenssseevsisvey ove NEEN EE 133 Atea FIs Disatmed eege deed 133 Area 2 Codepad Data 133 Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed A 132 Area 2 In Alarm csiicisciscectscedssnsceitesnsscesasestseoezesvessnss 132 Area Enegkeet Ode kogo s eee 133 Area 2 Is Disarmed AA 133 Area 3 Codepad Data 133 Area 3 Has Zone Unsealed 132 Area 3 Un Al arms ees deeg EEE S 132 Area 3 Is Armed EEN 133 225 Area 3 Is Disamed 133 Area 4 Codepad Dat 0 cece cssceesseeseceseeeeseeeens 133 Area 4 Has Zone Unsealed cseseseseseeeseeneeees 132 Area 4 In Alari onnsa nnn a 132 Area 4 Is Armed E 133 Area 4 Is Disammed 133 Armed In AWAY Mode 127 Armed In STAY Mode 127 AUxiiary Code Liss nunen renei 131 Auxiliary Code Zori an a E T 131 CHE erer e e E T e e 132 Codepad Duress Alarm s sssssseesersesseeereseeeseessresees 129 Codepad Fire Alarm 129 Codepad Medical Alarm 129 Codepad Panic Alamm riihi einean 129 Codepad Tamper issis pen apre pe ini nea 129 Communications Failure ccccccccccccecccseseseseseneees 131 Day Alarm Pnabled AAA 128 Day Alarm Latchung an r 128 Day Alarm Resetting 0 cece ceseceeeseeseceneeeeseeeees 128 Dialler Dee asi cdi Ee E 131 Daller Disabled then avec
155. eg ated eee at age tt 106 Zone EE 107 1 amp 2 Lockout Siren amp Lockout Kale ssenari e E Seege 107 4 Silent Alarm EE 107 8 SONSOL Watch speeches eR ate A es A te te ee 108 Zone Pulse Counts EE EE SEENEN 108 Zone Pulse Count Handover ech deisde ider cevacivnsepecsenestagsesuydlocashsadecentgancovesaepsuse ounce padi sess EEE SE ER or E EEE SEESE SEES 109 Zone Pulse Count Time reei oieee a ee eo ei See EEN cosa EEEE EEE EE RE 109 LBE rn EE 110 RV e E 110 Day Adar EE 110 Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1101 111 Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1 20 Onwardet 111 Day Alarm In Barong ebessen Edge EE 111 EOL RESSO Vale ieoor sd reed tg Eaei a pee abestectegndypedcupontcans EE reesthestersdy E E ESS iSe 112 SYSTEM STATUS INFORMATION egcgeeeege Eege eege LL SYSTEM STATUS INFORMATION sscccszesspcaceesssetsense esop in dE EE SEENEN Eden Ode Edge ech Eaa 114 Zone Bypass Reports 1 8 usenet aicen sets coleecesescesvhenscnsensuacs sons dee dee 114 Zone Bypass Reports 9 16 ee eth Bele ee eine Relies Seite ie laa nia Aes 114 Zone Trouble Report 128 ET 115 Zone Trouble Report 9 16 erresis dvecslenseesdyducevs veeasecseedusecochvosevany su vevethiecsdasdentyeesubesvtcseped eevedeevnceties de tig ddrdbeoeteatyeeededtes 115 GCodepad Duress sage SE EES EELER EEN 116 Codepad Panic Seena a n nee Sh ganas EE eee nee se aes 117 Access Denied DEE 118 PAC Tar cs sses tees e des Suits E S E E pace sep E te oda Ss laa cause
156. emely simple by the use of the Installer s Programming Command 965 Refer to Installers Programming Commands on page 23 for more information How To Set Up The Control Panel For Domestic Dialling 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode EG 123 4 followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter Command 9 6 5 followed by the AWAYJ button Two beeps will be heard The control panel has now been set up for Domestic Dialling Format AWAY 3 Exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering Command 9 6 O followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish 4 To program your telephone numbers enter the MasTER cope followed by 2 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information If there are telephone numbers already programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the ZONE indicators on the codepad If there are no previous programmed telephone numbers a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last telephone number has been displayed 5 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 1 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 6 After you have entered all t
157. en the system has been disarmed The indicator will also illuminate when the system has been disarmed This indicator will illuminate when you attempt to isolate zones The person will flash once every 3 seconds The FAULT icon will illuminate if the control panel has registered a fault condition Steady A fault has been acknowledged Flashing A new fault has occurred Off No faults have occurred This indicator will illuminate when the system has entered either Installer s Programming Mode or Operators Programming Mode Both persons will flash The OFF icon will illuminate when the system is in the disarmed state and will flash when a zone becomes unsealed It will stop flashing when all zones are sealed The ON icon will illuminate when the system is armed in the AWAY mode and will flash when an alarm occurs The indicator will reset once a valid user code has been entered Table 12 ICON Indicators and Descriptions Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 35 System Operations Arming The System In AWAY Mode There are two methods for arming your system in the AWAY Mode Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and requires to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 161 Note Single button arming in AWAY Mode will report as user code number 32 Method One How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode 1 Enter your cone followed by the LAWAY button Two be
158. ent If Installer s Programming Mode has been entered and a codepad panic alarm has been triggered the Installer s Programming Mode will be terminated as the panic alarm has priority Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Panic Alarm report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 483 with a zero Software Version 1 37 A Panic Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 120 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when either the two outside buttons L and 3 or sm and LAWAY are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to LOCATION 666 on page 155 if you require codepad panic to be silent A Fire Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 110 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the 4 and 6 buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm A Medical report Contact ID Event Code 100 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the 7 and 9 buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Note To disable both the reporting and the audible alarms for ALL codepad alarm events the dialler channel for Codepad Panic in LOCATION 483 will need to be programmed as zero and enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent in LOCATION 666 on page 155 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 118 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual LOCATION 484 487 4211 Location Description Contact ID Eve
159. eport For the wiring diagram for the 25 Pin Logging Printer and the 9 Pin Printer please refer to Figure 18 19 Page 199 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 90 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Event Printer Log Report Incoming Alarm Link Call Answering Incoming Call Codepad Medical Alarm Medical Codepad Alarm Codepad Panic Alarm Panic Codepad Alarm Battery Falls Below 10 5V With No AC Table 41 Serial Printer Messages ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Base Station Information 92 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Base Station Information This section outlines the programming information required for the So lut ion 16 control panel when communicating with base station receivers Typically these parameters specify the telephone numbers to call the transmission formats handshake tones and transmission speeds How To Program A Phone Number When programming the telephone number if a 0 is required it must be programmed as a 10 Each location in the primary secondary and callback telephone numbers hold one digit of the telephone number Example To program the telephone number 9 672 1055 you would program 96721 1045 5 Programming The End Of A Phone Number To tell the dialler when the end of the telephone number has been reached a O must be inserted at the end of the telephone number Therefore th
160. eps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will illuminate Exit time will now begin CODE AWAY Method Two How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode 1 Hold down the away button until two beeps are heard The AWAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now begin Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 to enable Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 amp STAY Mode 2 away If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated It will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed i e If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming To enable forced arming Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 will need to be enabled If the AWAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system Disarming The System From AWAY Mode How To Disarm The System From AWAY Mode 1 Enter your cone followed by the LAWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will extinguish A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone
161. er Of The Zone 9 N O Switches Are Closed N C Figure 16 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 12V 12V Eight Programmable GND Outputs 12V JP2 Solution 16 Eight Channel Output Board CC884 JP1 Figure 17 Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 Maximum current is 400 ma per Output ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 199 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch Momentary or Latching Keyswitch Figure 18 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch Connections For 25 Pin Logging Printer EE To Solution 16 16 Terminal OUT3 Fs 10K Ohm Resistor To Solution 16 Terminal GND ofofofofofotofofofafopoto DB25 Connector Figure 19 Connections For 25 Pin Serial Logging Printer Connections For 9 Pin Logging Printer Ok 1 To Solution 16 Oo 7 Terminal OUT3 O73 10K Ohm Resistor O 8 4 S To Solution 16 Terminal GND DB9 Connector Figure 20 Connections For 9 Pin Serial Logging Printer Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual 200 Solution 16 Component Overlay Line Fault Module NOTE POLARITY a NE FAI MODULE
162. er Shutdown Count Locations V1 10 1 37 Swinger shutdown determines the amount of times the sirens and dialler can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout siren or lockout dialler for swinger shutdown to be effective Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the sirens is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 662 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings If Lockout Dialler has been programmed for any zone the last restore signal will not be transmitted until the system or area if partitioned has been disarmed ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 147 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren LOCATION 662 0 Location Description 662 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren 0 15 Ta
163. erate when Auxiliary Code 2 has been entered The output will reset when Auxiliary Code 2 has been entered again The output can be activated via the remote codepad the Alarm Link Software CC816 or a touch tone telephone if a DTMF Command Module CC886 has been enabled and connected to the control panel Telephone Line Fault This output will operate when the Solution Line Fault Module CC887 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected for more than 40 seconds The output will reset once the telephone line has been restored continuously for more than 40 seconds This output will not operate unless the Solution Line Fault Module CC887 has been enabled in LOCATION 673 on page 166 Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls This output will operate when the communication dialler has made 3 unsuccessful calls to the base station receiver The output will reset when all messages have been transmitted i e When the buffer is empty or when all possible attempts have been made Communications Failure This event will operate when the communication dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver It will reset when the first Kiss Off has been received This output does not operate for domestic or voice reporting formats Dialler Disabled This output will operate as long as the communication dialler has been disabled in LOCATION 663 on page 152 The output will reset once the dialler reporting functi
164. erations and we believe that our objectives in this area have been more than satisfied This installation manual will explain all aspects of programming the So lut ion 16 control panel from factory default to final commissioning All system parameters and options are detailed however suitability is left up to the individual Every control panel can be tailored to meet all requirements quickly and easily The programming simplicity will make your installation quick accurate and rewarding each and every time The So lut ion range of control panels has proven very popular amongst thousands of people throughout many countries of the world all who have various levels of technical aptitude and ability We have tried to aim this installation manual to all levels of readers As the So lu t ion control panels have continued to advance over the years they have become very powerful and extensive Some of its early first time users have advanced to true power users and we need to address their needs too while maintaining the simplicity of the manual and the product ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Introduction 15 Quick Start The following steps will enable you to use the S o lu t io n 16 control panel with the factory default values 1 Connect the AC plug pack to the control panel All zone indicators on the remote codepad will illuminate momentarily and then extinguish Check the operation of the overload L
165. essful transmission to the base station receiver when exit time has expired The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Note This output will operate when a kiss off is received via the safecom network V2 03 Entry Warning This output will operate when either Entry Time 1 Entry Time 2 Entry Time 3 Entry Time 4 or Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode are operating The output will reset when the entry time expires Entry Warning Day Alarm Resetting This output combines both Entry Warning and Day Alarm Resetting so that either of these two events will activate the output If the output has been triggered by either Entry Time 1 Entry Time 2 Entry Time 3 Entry Time 4 or Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode the output will reset once the Entry Time has expired or the system has been disarmed If the output has been triggered by a zone programmed for day alarm the output will reset when the zone has resealed Day Alarm Resetting This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output will reset when the day alarm zone has resealed Day Alarm Latching This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output will reset when the away button has been pressed If the control panel has been partitioned pressing the AWAY button on a CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad other than that the zone was allocated or pressing the AWAY button on a CP5 Master Pa
166. ester 188 ISSUE222 DOC 224 Hand Held Programmer 186 Handover Sequential Handover eee eeseceeseeeseceseeesseees 155 Handover Zone 5 cisssteevsseessochsecsscbspensteessessetedouinen says 105 Handover Zone Isolate In STAY 1 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeees 105 Handshake Tone eee cee cesecse cece cneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 Hold Down Functions Arm In AWAY Mode kA 6l Arm In STAY Mode 1 6l Arm In STAY Mode 2 6l ET 62 Codepad ID and Buzzer Tone Change 64 Fault Analysis ensnare nisani 63 Horn Speaker Testiin a E A 61 Initiate Modem Call 63 Initiate Test Reports sic ennnen ss 64 Reset Latching Outputs 0 ee eee cess ceseeereeees 63 Strobe Testis ee ee Re 62 Turn Day Alarm On Off AA 62 ee 43 Bengel Ee EES 154 Monte sde ENEE 154 RE 6l I Installer Code ssiri sisser erens srenso oreore sseaeecostessess 98 Installer Code Function Pvent MeMot yerri en i covssben danse sebeesd 47 Satellite Siren Service Mode AA 48 Set First Test Report ccovsccstegsesececetnesteesenedseverdesnecstet 46 Telephone Monitor Mode 49 Walk Testei if E R REIROS 48 Installer s Programming Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Stats 23 959 Test Programming Key 24 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 24 961 Default System ee ccs ceeeeeseeeneeeeeeeees 24 962 Copy Control Panel To Key eee eee 25 963 Copy Key To Control Panel 0 0 eee eee 25 964 Erase Programming Rex 26 965 Domestic Dialling ee eee ee
167. event memory playback will report as follows Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description A All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed Zone 4 AWAY Indicator lluminates Alarm In Zone 4 Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Iluminates System Armed In AWAY Mode Table 22 Event Memory Recall Example Event Playback A beep and an illuminated indicator indicate each event Resetting a 24 hour alarm in the disarmed state is indicated by one beep only After the last event three beeps will be heard to indicate the end of playback The replay can be terminated at any time by pressing the AWAY button Note If the control panel has been powered down the memory of all events will be lost Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 56 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual 4 Walk Test Mode Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly This should be performed on a weekly basis Before activating walk test mode isolate any zones that are not required for testing Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for more information on isolating zones How To Enter Walk Test Mode 1 Enter your masten cone followed by 4 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash The codepad will beep once every second while the system is in the walk test mode 2 Unse
168. f 0 o Location 684 687 TTT Page 177 Subscriber ID Number For Area 3 HDD EE EE Ye ete Th ter ret EE EE EE EE Page 177 Subscriber ID Number For Area 4 ofofo o ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets Location 692 699 Zone Allocations For Area 1 219 Page 178 Location 700 707 Zone Allocations For Area 2 Page 178 Location 708 715 Zone Allocations For Area 3 Ka Page 17 Location 716 723 Zone Allocations For Area 4 Ka Page 17 Location 724 755 User Code Allocations Location 724 Areas For User Yo Location 728 Areas For User 5 Location 732 Areas For User o Location 736 Areas For User sio Location 740 Areas For User 17 Location 744 Areas For User alo Location 748 Areas For User 25 0 Location 752 Areas For User 291 0 Location 725 Areas For User d Location 729 Areas For User 6 Location 733 Areas For User d Location 737 Areas For User uio Location 741 Areas For User 18 Location 745 Areas For User 22 H Location 749 Areas For User 26 0 Location 753 Areas For User 30 0 Location 726 Areas For User di Location 730 Areas For User d Location 734 Areas For User ujo Location 738 Areas For User sjo Location 742 Areas For User 19 Location 746 Areas For User d Location 750 Areas For User d Locat
169. face CC813 Momentary NOTE ON OFF HOME SWITCHES MUST BE MOMENTARY Access Control On Off OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Access Control Control Panel Interface CC813 Radio Key On Off ANTENNA Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Single Channel Control Panel Interface CC813 Receiver Card RS001 Figure 12 Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 Connection Diagram Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 192 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 194 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Terminal Definitions and Descriptions EARTH 18V AC BATTERY BATTERY GND 12V CLK DATA 12V OUT3 OUT2 OUT GND 12V STRB SPK COM ISSUE222 DOC This terminal should be connected to the green wire on the TF008 Plug Pack that is internally connected to the mains earth Extensive lightning protection has been built into the control panel and this terminal will have to be connected correctly if you are to take the best advantage of the protection provided These two terminals are plug on type and are the termination point for the TF008 Plug Pack The voltage of the plug pack being used must be 18 22 volts AC and rated at 1 3 Amps minimum for correct operation The BATTERY connects to the red pos
170. facing of a momentary keyswitch or radio equipment for remote control operations to operate the control panel If the R K terminal is used a number of momentary keyswitches may be connected in parallel for multiple arm disarm locations The ON and OFF terminals can be used to directly interface to any access control system For non partitioned control panels the HOME Mode terminal will force the system to arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1 There is also a PANIC terminal that allows the customer to issue a panic alarm from a remote keyswitch or hand held radio transmitter This is handy if you require your system to be radio controlled and you would like to give your customer total control via a hand held radio remote Indication beeps can be provided via the horn speakers when arming and disarming using this interface board Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 for more information As you can see the radio key keyswitch interface allows you the flexibility to perform quite a number of functions cheaply and easily No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 134 Horn Speaker Beeps 2 Channel Radio Interface RE005 The EDM 2 channel radio interface has been designed to allow customers to remotely operate Solution control panels and control two on board relays The interface may also be used as a stand alone receiver independent of a Solution control panel and used
171. ff oo ee cece cee ceeeeeraeeeenees 57 Walk eet ege Ee enen Set e ee SE 56 Master Partitioned Codepad Area Display Indieators 172 Area On Off Indicators cccccceceescseeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeees 172 AUX D ee 173 FAULT Tele alogge eet 173 MAINS Indicator 173 PARTIAL Indicator cccceeeeecscsesesrseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 Zone Indicatorg seedeet p rese Esni 172 Medical Alarmi oenen ne eee EES 40 Modem Call rekt 63 Modem Module 156 186 Momentary Input ATM Area EE 165 Arm In AWAY Mode 165 Arm In STAY Mode 1 165 Arm In STAY Mode 72 165 Arm Disarm Area A 165 Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 163 164 RE 165 DiSarm ONLY ssncereveciedectuncevevessseriseteseseteddedsstecaence deve 165 Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch eee 199 N Night Arm Station oc eeessececssececeesneeeceseeeeeenseeeeees 188 Enable dee ENEE Eed Ne 155 O Off Indicator Zone Sealed cccccccecccececececeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 On Indicator Zone In Alarm 34 Open Close Reports c ccsssteaseseus Seegen SE 120 ATCA E 176 EES EE ee Athos a haere Sie 176 ER EE 176 Ee BUS cache ee ee Eege 176 First To Open Last To Close cece eeeeeees 153 175 MSTA Mole ebe en ech ews E R dee Ee 153 Ier SEAN Mode lives cccccccacecescncssceccuesengeeeseeecedeetenvess 175 Jo STAY Mode eier ate tiorteeteite nel dE 175 Only If Previous Alarm Oecuted 153 175 Optional Equipment Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited In
172. for further information on telephone line fault 2 Sound Alarm When System Is Armed If Telephone Line Fails Option 1 in LOCATION 673 will need to be enabled for this option to operate If the Telephone Line Fault Module CC873 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will operate If the control panel has been partitioned this option will operate when any area has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 4 Sound Alarm When System Is Armed If Telephone Line Fails Option 1 in LOCATION 673 will need to be enabled for this option to operate If the Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is disarmed the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will operate If the system has been partitioned this option will operate only when ALL areas have been disarmed 8 Reserved Note If ALL three options have been enabled the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will operate in either armed or disarmed state If a serial printer has been connected to output 3 the message Phone Line Failure will be reported when the telephone line has been disconnected Once the telephone line has been restored for more than 40 seconds continuously the message Phone Line Restore will be reported The printer will log the actual date and time that the rep
173. for two seconds will acknowledge the AC mains fault and will stop the codepad beeping once every minute How To Determine The Type Of System Fault To determine the type of system fault that has occurred enter Fault Analysis Mode by following the procedures below 1 Hold down the B button until two beeps are heard The FAULT indicator should remain steady and the STAY and AWAY indicators should flash in unison with each other The ZONE indicators will indicate the type of system fault Refer to the Table 13 Fault Indicators for the list of different system faults that may occur Zone Indicator Fault Description a rm Speaker Disconnected 6 ero SCS 8 Communications Faire SSCS Table 13 Fault Indicators 2 To exit fault analysis mode press the away button The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish and the FAULT indicator will remain illuminated How To Acknowledge The System Fault 1 To acknowledge the system fault press the aal button The FAULT indicator will remain illuminated and the codepad will cease its once a minute beep Fault Descriptions 1 Low Battery A low battery fault will register when the battery supply voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when a dynamic battery test detects a low capacity battery This fault will clear after a successful dynamic battery test A dynamic battery test is performed every four hours once power has been connected to the control panel and also every time the sy
174. form any system functions using the codepad on a touch tone telephone for Master Code User Code and Installer Code Functions as well as access into Installer s Programming Mode Below will give an example of making a connection to the control panel and changing the Exit Time for AWAY Mode to 26 seconds on a non partitioned system To connect to a system which has been partitioned refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 for further information Example How To Establish A Communication Link With The Control Panel 1 Dial the telephone number that the control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call you will hear a short jingle 2 After the jingle press the O button on the telephone You will now hear a second jingle and have established a communication link with the control panel Programming The Control Panel Once A Communication Link Has Been Established Once the connection has been established enter your INSTALLER cove followed by the button Two beeps will be heard If no beeps are heard enter a user code to disarm the system before entering the Installer s Code again After entering Installer s Programming Mode follow the steps below to program the new Exit Time for AWAY Mode To go to LOCATION 632 enter 6 3 2 followed by the button Enter the value Loj followed by the button Press the button to move to the next location Enter the value
175. ge 131 Output Number 4 Output Event Type 2 11 Refer to page 131 Output Number 5 Output Event Type 1 1 Refer to page 128 How To Turn An Output OFF From The Remote Codepad 1 Enter your masten cone followed by 5 andthe AWAY J button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the required opt no followed by the SCT button Two beeps will be heard and the output will turn off Repeat step 2 if more than one output is required to be turned off Press the AWAY button to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish ASTER CODEJ 5 AWAY 4 OUTPUT No STAY AWAY Output Number 1 Output Event Type 2 8 Refer to page 131 Output Number 2 Output Event Type 2 9 Refer to page 131 Output Number 3 Output Event Type 2 10 Refer to page 131 Output Number 4 Output Event Type 2 11 Refer to page 131 Output Number 5 Output Event Type 1 1 Refer to page 128 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 58 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual 6 Setting The Date and Time This function needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the system has been powered down How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your masten cone followed by 6 andthe AWAY J button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 25 Ente
176. h back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired when the event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed This means that the one shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time setting 14 Normally Low Latching Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts once the 7 button on the remote codepad has been held down until two beeps are heard Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity Output Polarity Software Version 1 10 Only There are thirteen different polarities to choose from Each polarity is designated by a number This number needs to be programmed into the appropriate location of the output being used to indicate how the output should operate Note Refer to Output Polarity Software Version 1 20 on page 134 for the description of the different polarity types Option Polarity Option Polarity Of OutputNotUsed o ee 1 Normally Open Going Lon LB Normally Lon Gong Open Normally Open Pulsing Low 9 Normally Low PulsingOpen _ 4 Normally Open One Shot Low Can Reset 11 Normally Low One Shot Open Can Reset 6 Normally Open LatchingLow 13 Normally Low Latching Open Table 71 Event Type Polarities Only For Software Version 1 10 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 136 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Ma
177. he digits of the first telephone number press the sm button if there is more than one phone number This will insert a break between the first telephone number and the second telephone number If there is only AWAY one phone number press the button to exit this mode 7 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 8 After the last digit of the second telephone number press the away button to exit this mode unless a third telephone number is required Your control panel has now been set up to report in the Domestic Dialling Format Test the dialling functions by triggering the control panel to report to your programmed telephone numbers How To Disable Domestic Dialling Using The Master Code If at any time the Master Code holder wishes to cancel domestic dialling for any reason eg They are moving house and they do not wish the system to continue calling their place of work or mobile phone etc they can enter the MasteR cone followed by 2 and then the away button the STAY J button and the away button to disable domestic dialling MASTER CODE 2 AWAY STAY AWAY ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 79 Domestic Dialling Operation When the control panel has activated into alarm condition it will commence dialling the first programmed telephone num
178. he installer and can be changed as many times as necessary The message can be any length between 1 16 seconds Refer to Synthesised Voice Reporting on page 80 for more information ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 187 Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 This module is used to monitor the existence of the telephone line connected to the control panel There are a number of options for the different type of indications available when a line fault has been detected Refer to LOCATION 673 on page 166 for the different options available DTMF Command Module CC886 This module is required to be connected to the control panel if any remote programming or operating commands are required to be carried out from a touch tone telephone Refer to LOCATION 671 on page 162 for more information on the available options that may be enabled Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 for more information on operational procedures Dialler Amplifier Lead CC807 This lead is required when using a telephone amplifier for listening to the data transmissions between the control panel and the base station receiver The standard inductive pick up that is supplied with the amplifier is not compatible with the S o lu t ion range of control panels This lead plugs into the amplifier unit and onto the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the S o lut io n 16 control panel Alarm Li
179. ht but even more disturbing is the fact that the initial failed call attempts allow for the establishment of an audio connection between the would be burglar and the control panel Anyone with a little knowledge of alarm systems will be able to actually trick the dialler into thinking it is talking to a base station thus actually clearing the alarm signal Pretty frightening when you thought the control panel you were using and recommending to your customers is supposed to have anti jamming At Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited we take anti jamming very seriously and have in fact devoted a great deal of time and money researching this problem Our engineers have come up with the best possible anti jamming procedure known and patented accordingly Patent Number 571994 Our procedure is very simple and effective because we never answer the burglars phone call and the Telecom Network will automatically clear an unanswered call in approximately ninety seconds This time will be even shorter if the call is originated through the Mobile Net Network where it will most likely be in the case of a true burglary Once the control panel detects that the phone line has stopped ringing it immediately loops the line and makes its call therefore transmitting its alarm message successfully The line is also automatically disconnected from the telephones within the protected premises immediately on an alarm condition by the control panel to further confuse th
180. ial printer can be connected to the control panel to report all events that have occurred The logging of an event will include the time and date along with a description of the event that occurred The serial printer is required to be connected to Output 3 and programmed as follows OUTPUT 3 LOCATION 552 557 000000 Select the required baud rate that the printer is to communicate at with the control panel Printer Output Baud Rate LOCATION 756 2 Option Printer Baud Rate Oa 2400 BPS Table 38 Location 756 Option Bits Refer to Table 41 Serial Printer Messages on page 90 for a full list of events that will be logged by the serial printer connected to output 3 Additional Messages When System Has Been Partitioned Zone On Area Triggered Into Alarm Alarm Zone Area Zone On Area Restored Alarm Restore Zone Area Area Armed Area Armed By User Area Disarmed Zone Bypassed In Area Zone Bypass Restore In Area Zone Trouble In Area Zone Trouble Restore In Area Table 39 Additional Serial Printer Messages When Partitioned The symbol represents the zone or area number in the transmission The following example shows how a single transmission will be displayed via the serial printer connected to output 3 A similar message to the one below will be seen when user arms the alarm system Date Time Event 09 12 96 12 30 42 System Armed By User Table 40 Example Serial Printer Log R
181. ies For Software Version 1 20 Normally Open One Shot Low Retrigger Normally Low One Shot Open Retrigger 0 Output Not Used If an output is not required for use the polarity should be programmed as zero 1 Normally Open Going Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity 2 Normally Open Pulsing Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to pulsing zero volts when the event occurs It will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored Time parameters vary the On time of the pulse 3 Normally Open One Shot Low This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs It will switch back to open circuit when the time parameter setting has expired This one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset 4 Normally Open One Shot Low With Retrigger This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs Every time the event occurs it will restart the one shot timer The output will switch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired This polarity is ideally suited for lighting control A PIR can be used to trigger an output for turning on lights While ever there is movement the P
182. igit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 7 After you have entered all the digits of the first telephone number press the stay J button if there is more than one phone number This will insert a break between the first telephone number and the second telephone number If there is only AWAY one phone number press the button to exit this mode 8 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 9 After the last digit of the second telephone number press the away J button to exit this mode unless a third telephone number is required Your control panel has now been set up to report in Synthesised Voice Format Test the dialling functions by triggering the control panel to report to your programmed telephone numbers ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 81 How To Disable Synthesised Voice Dialling Using The Master Code If at any time the Master Code holder wishes to cancel Synthesised Voice dialling for any reason eg They are moving house and they do not wish the system to continue calling their place of work or mobile phone etc they can enter the MasteR cone followed by 2 and then the AWAY button the STAY button and the away button to disable domestic dialling MASTER CODE 2 away STAY AWAY Synthesised Voice Dialling Operati
183. ill repeat this procedure until all the data has been programmed to suit your requirements The factory default settings have been selected for reporting in the Contact ID Format Note 15 is the maximum value that can be programmed into any location There are two programming modes The Installer s Programming Mode and the Operators Programming Mode Both programming modes have individual access codes and these two codes must always be programmed differently The Master Code as well as being able to arm and disarm the system gives access to the Operators Programming Mode The Installers Code only gives access to the Installer s Programming Mode and does NOT arm and disarm the system Programming of the So lut ion 16 control panel can be carried out via any of the following five methods System Codepad Hand Held Programmer CC814 Programming Key CC891 Alarm Link Upload Download Software CC816 DTMF Command Module CC886 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 19 Programming With The Remote Codepad The control panel must be in the disarmed state with no flashing zone alarm memories to access the Installer s Programming Mode This can be achieved by entering the followed by the away button The factory default Master Code i2580 To access the Installer s Programming Mode enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by the away button The factory default Installer Code is 1 2 34 Three bee
184. inate and exit time for STAY Mode 1 will now commence Any zone that have been programmed for STAY Mode 1 will be automatically isolated and their respective indicators will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the zone indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep STAY If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated It will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed i e If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming To enable forced arming Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 will need to be enabled If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 37 Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1 There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 1 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and requires to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 161 Note Method two will
185. ing This option is valid only when the control panel has been programmed for domestic dialling format A defaulted control panel will seize the telephone line and commence reporting an alarm condition During its report the control panel looks for a tone either from a hand held phone controller or if a DTMF Command Module is not fitted the button on a touch tone telephone Once the control panel has received this tone the control panel terminates the report and hangs up the telephone line otherwise the control panel will keeps dialling until it reaches its maximum call attempts With this option disabled the control panel will not look for the Kiss Off tone and will therefore keep reporting until the unit is either disarmed or the maximum call count has been reached 4 Extend Acknowledge Tone Detection From 30 60 Seconds The control panel after dialling the monitoring station will wait approximately 30 seconds for receipt of a valid handshake tone The handshake tone indicates to the control panel that it has reached the monitoring station and can now transmit its messages Enabling this option will extend the wait time from 30 seconds to 1 minute 8 If Battery Fails Restrict Battery Test Only On Arming V1 35 The control panel will execute a Dynamic Battery Test every four hours while the AC mains is present During this battery test the battery is loaded and its voltage monitored over a 3 second period If the battery voltage
186. ing Key EE 964 Erase ProgrammingKey SSCS 966 Enable and Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations During Programming This Command Displays The Control Panel s Software Version Number Only When Using The Hand Held Programmer Table 4 Installer s Programming Commands Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status Mode This function enables and disables the zone status display mode When using the hand held programmer the zones will be displayed on the seven segment displays from left to right If there is a dash illuminated on the display the corresponding zone is unsealed and if the display is blank the zone is sealed The third or centre display shows either the number 4 or the number 8 The number 4 constantly illuminated indicates that zones 4 are being displayed The number 8 constantly illuminated indicates that zones 5 8 are being displayed The number 4 flashing indicates zones 9 12 are being displayed The number 8 flashing indicates that zones 13 16 are being displayed Pressing the button will toggle the display between the zones This feature will prove to be very useful during installation as it allows you to view the status of the zones directly at the control panel saving you time and money How To Enable Zone Status Mode 1 Enter Installers Programming Mode 2 Enter command 9 5 8 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard How To Disable Zone Status Mode 1 Enter command 9 5 8 followed
187. ing pitch to indicate termination of the communication link When Installer s Programming Mode has been entered pressing the button twice on the telephone will not terminate the call You will need to exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering command 9 6 O followed by the button before pressing the button twice to terminate the communication link ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Operations 69 Upload Download Via Alarm Link Software The Solut ion 16 control panel can be remotely programmed or controlled via an IBM or compatible personal computer via the Alarm Link Software CC816 This facility will allow you to make alterations to your customers control panel without the need to leave your office thus improving customer service and saving you time and money For country locations where a control panel may be situated hundreds of kilometres from your office the Upload Download feature is invaluable When selecting the control panel type during the set up of a new customer database in the Alarm Link Software refer to the table below to select the software version number that corresponds to the control panel type required Control Panel s Select Software Version Panel Type S1611 S16_12 Se Ste S16 20 Table 25 Alarm Link Panel Forms After selecting the correct panel type when adding a new customer in the Alarm Link Software the Subscriber ID Number and the Installer Code wi
188. ion 754 Areas For User dp Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Page 180 Location 727 Areas For User d i Location 731 Areas For User 8 Location 735 Areas For User 12 H Location 739 Areas For User ifo Location 743 Areas For User 20 Location 747 Areas For User afo Location 751 Areas For User 28 0 Location 755 Areas For User 32 H ISSUE222 DOC 220 Location 756 i 1 300 Baud Printer Output Baud Rate Laas 3 1200 Baud 4 2400 Baud Location 757 V1 40 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler Location 760 763 V2 00 Safecom RF Fail Location 758 Location 759 Location 760 Location 761 Location 764 767 V2 00 Safecom Telco Fail Location 764 Location 765 Location 766 Location 767 Location 768 771 V2 00 fecom RF Jammin Sa eco J a g Location 764 Location 765 Location 766 ion 767 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Page 89 Ei Event Code Hundreds Digit Event Code Tens Digit Event Code Units Digit Dialler Channel 1 Event Code Hundreds Digit Event Code Tens Digit Event Code Units Digit Dialler Channel 1 Event Code Hundreds Digit Event Code Tens Digit Event Code Units Digit Dialler Channel Location 772 V2 00 Safecom RF Jamming Delay Location 773 V2 02 Safecom RF Supervision Time Location 846 847 V2 04 Ring Burst Tim
189. ion Board CC885 is fixed for 3K3 EOL resistors These eight zone expansion boards provide additional terminations for zones 9 16 Refer to LOCATION 672 on page 163 to enable the expansion board fitted ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 114 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Status Information This section covers features that are involved with the basic house keeping of the system This includes monitoring of the zones whether they are isolated from the system or more importantly that they are actually operating the status of both the AC mains and DC power to the system and codepad generated alarms activated by the user Zone Bypass Reports 1 8 LOCATION 468 469 99 Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format 469 Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 55 Zone Bypass Codes For Zones 1 8 A zone is bypassed when it is manually isolated A Zone Bypass report Contact ID Event Code 570 will be transmitted at the end of exit time for zones that have been manually isolated 24 hour zones cannot be manually isolated therefore they will never transmit bypass reports A Zone Bypass Restore report will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed If bypass restore is not programmed it can be assumed that it will transmit a bypass restore report when an opening report is transmitted All bypassed zones are automatically
190. is designed to operate with the So lut ion range of control panels It provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad is designed to be used with any Solution system that has been partitioned These codepads have dip switches on the printed circuit board to indicate which area in partitioning that the codepad belongs to Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 182 for further information on how to connect these codepads CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad CP500P This codepad is designed to operate with the Solut ion range of control panels It provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad is deigned to be used in any system when the system has been partitioned These codepads allow the user to toggle from one area to another without the need to go to each area codepad Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 182 for further information on how to connect these codepads Night Arm Station CP 105 The night arm station incorporates a panic button and is designed to allow system operation from a bedroom or sitting room to arm and disarm the system in STAY Mode 1 Phone Controller CC911 The phone controller operates at a frequency of 1400 Hz and allows the user to remotely arm the system in AWAY Mode via the telephone This phone controller can also be used to acknowledge a phone call from the control panel when the system is set up for domestic dialling Hand Held Dialler Tester DD901 The hand held
191. itive terminal of the battery and the BATTERY connects to the black negative terminal of the battery The battery should be a 12 volt sealed lead acid rechargeable type with a capacity of between 1 2 AH 6 5 AH The battery is protected by a 3 Amp fuse The charging globe that is situated above the 3 Amp fuse will always be illuminated until the battery is 100 charged Because the battery is pulse charged it is not possible to read 13 8 volts from the battery leads This group of terminals are the connection points for your system codepads All system codepads should connect in a parallel configuration back to these terminals The only factor restricting the number of codepads that can be connected is the available power and its distribution Each codepad has a maximum power requirement of 60 ma with all indicators illuminated therefore this should be taken into consideration when calculating your available continuous power The total continuous stand by current on the system should not exceed 500 mA maximum combined external load is 1 Amp with backup battery Note If the system has been partitioned the connection of codepads will be different Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 182 or Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning on page 181 for more information This group of terminals are the output interface terminals They can be configured to any combination of the functions available via the
192. l after the message has been transmitted If multiple messages are transmitted the sirens will activate after the last Kiss Off has been sent If the transmission back to the base station was unsuccessful and a Kiss Off was not received the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will activate after the third call attempt 24 hour alarms are not effected by this option The sirens will always activate immediately upon a 24 hour alarm 2 Reset Alarm Outputs From Any Area Partitioned Systems Only This option is only applicable when the control panel has been partitioned If this option has been enabled any valid user code from any area will be able to stop the horn speaker strobe bell and EDMSAT outputs from operating This option does not allow a user code allocated from one area to disarm another area 4 Auto Arming In AWAY Mode If automatic arming in AWAY Mode is preferred to automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 this option will need to be enabled When the system has been partitioned ALL areas will automatically arm in AWAY Mode 8 Auto Arming In STAY Mode 1 If automatic arming in STAY Mode is preferred to automatic arming in the AWAY Mode this option will need to be enabled When the system has been partitioned ALL areas will automatically arm in STAY Mode 1 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 158 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Options 4 LOCATION 668 V1
193. le area when the control panel has been partitioned A number between 1 15 is required to be entered into each of these locations to assign each user code holder to the areas they require to operate Multiple user codes can be allocated to the same areas Select the required areas that the user code holder is to operate and then add the option values together from Table 133 User Code Allocations below eg If the user code is allocated to operate all four areas program a 15 i e 1 2 4 8 15 into the required location relevant to their user code allocation If the user code is allocated only to Area 1 and Area 3 i e 1 4 5 program their user code allocation as 5 Option Allocated Areas E Aa 8 Lei Table 133 User Code Allocations Location 724 User Code 1 H Location 728 User Code 5 H Location 732 User Code 9 Location 736 User Code 13 Location 740 User Code 17 Location 744 User Code 21 Location 748 User Code 25 Location 752 User Code 29 ISSUE222 DOC Location 725 User Code 2 H Location 729 User Code 6 H Location 733 User Code 10 Location 737 User Code 14 H Location 741 User Code 18 Location 745 User Code 22 Location 748 User Code 26 Location 753 User Code 30 Location 726 User Code 3 H Location 730 User Code 7 H Location 734 User Code 11 Location 738 User Code 15 Location 742 User Code 19 Location 746 User Code 23 Location 750 User Code
194. ll need to match that of the control panel for synchronisation when making connection to the control panel If these two locations do not match that of the control panel the computer and the control panel will not synchronise Direct Connect The direct connect feature has been incorporated giving the installer a simple method for programming the Solution 16 control panel at the office There is no need for telephone lines or modems that makes programming of the control panel completed easily in minutes It can also be used on site visits where the installer is using a portable personal computer All that is required is the Direct Link Cable CC808 connected to the relevant serial port on your IBM or compatible computer and the other end to the Auxiliary Module socket on the control panel When using the direct connect method of connecting to the control panel Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 152 does not require to be enabled The direct connect method of connecting to the control panel will operate regardless of this option set Note If the Solut ion 16 has an optional Voice Module connected and enabled the direct connect method of connecting to the control panel will not function unless Option 15 in LOCATION 050 has been disabled and the Voice Module disabled prior to the connection being made Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 70 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Remote Connect
195. location press the away button The next locations data will now be displayed To exit the Installer s Programming Mode enter command 9 6 0 followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return back to normal operation Refer to Installers Programming Commands on page 23 for further information on commands that can be performed during access of the Installer s Programming Mode Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 20 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Programming With The Hand Held Programmer The Hand Held Programmer CC814 has five seven segment displays The three on the left display the location number and the two on the right display the data for that particular location To connect the hand held programmer locate the connections marked PROGRAMMING KEY This point can be found on the left hand side of the printed circuit board Observe the triangular markings on the printed circuit board and line them up with the markings on the hand held programmers connecting socket When the hand held programmer is correctly plugged onto the printed circuit board one beep will be heard and four centre bars on the hand held programmer will illuminate with either an A or U suffix to indicate the system is armed or unarmed Only when the Installer s Programming Mode has been accessed will any numerals appear on the display Note When connecting the hand held pr
196. message The voice message can be recorded in any language and once programmed it will be retained indefinitely irrespective of power loss No messy batteries are required How To Set Up The Control Panel For Synthesised Voice Format 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode EG 12 3 4 followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter Command 9 6 5 followed by the AWAYJ button Two beeps will be heard The control panel has now been set up for Domestic Dialling Format 3 Enable Synthesised Voice Format by programming LOCATION 050 as 15 AWAY 4 Exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering Command 9 6 O followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish 5 To program your telephone numbers enter the followed by 2 andthe away button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information If there are telephone numbers already programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the ZONE indicators on the codepad If there are no previous programmed telephone numbers a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last telephone number has been displayed 6 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 1 one digit at a time You will notice as each d
197. mmand can only be used with the hand held programmer Enter command 9 9 D followed by the button to display the control panel s software version number Two beeps will be heard Press the button to exit this command ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 29 Disable Factory Default LOCATION 900 0 The system has a feature that prevents the control panel from being manually defaulted via the default button or by using a programming key Any number between 0 14 programmed into this location will allow defaulting of the control panel If 15 has been programmed into this location defaulting of the control panel will not operate and the Installer Code MUST be used for further programming of the control panel If the Installer Code is not known the control panel will need to be returned to your EDM Distributor for exchange A nominal fee applies for this service Warning Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited does not recommend the use of this feature If this option is required a special programming procedure has been introduced to eliminate any possibility of accidentally setting this option The default button on the PCB must be held down while programming this location How To Prevent Manual Defaulting Of The Control Panel Plug the hand held programmer to the pins provided on the PCB Disarm the system Access Installer s Programming Mode Go to LOCATION 900 Hold down th
198. mming Key To Control Panel This command is used to copy data from the programming key to the control panel How To Copy The Programming Key Memory To The Control Panel 1 2 3 4 5 Enter Installer s Programming Mode Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel Enter command 9 6 3 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming key s data has now been copied to the control panel Enter command 9 6 OQ followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Now disconnect the programming key from the control panel How To Copy The Programming Key Memory To The Control Panel Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 2 Before connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 9 6 3 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming keys data will now be copied to the control panel Enter command 9 6 OQ followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Leave the switch on the hand held programmer in the EXT position and disconnect the programming key Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 26 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Command 964 Erase Prog
199. n enabled the horn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY Mode Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 164 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Expansion Board Type LOCATION 672 Software Version 1 20 0 Option Description i Description Momentary Disarm Momentary Arm Area 4 Momentary Disarm Area 4 Momentary Arm Disarm Area 4 Latching Input For Arm and Disarm Latching Arm Disarm Area 4 Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1 Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 2 Table 116 Expansion Board Type Software Version 1 20 This location enables the operation of an optional eight zone expansion board eight channel output board or a number of different options for keyswitch operated inputs to arm or disarm the system The keyswitch operated inputs need to be connected to the JP5 terminals EXP and GND Every time the system is armed or disarmed via the keyswitch operated input user code 32 will be transmitted with the Open Close reports Refer to Figure 18 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch on page 199 for more information on wiring the JP5 pins for keyswitch operation Note Only one option can be selected from the options listed in this location 0 No Expansion Board Fitted 1 Eight Zone Expansion
200. n the AC mains has been disconnected from the control panel Output Event Type AC Fail on page 128 will operate regardless of this option being set Note V1 40 V2 05 software still beeps the codepad buzzer once every minute when the AC mains has registers as failed when this option is programmed 8 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 If automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 is preferred to automatic arming in the AWAY Mode this option will need to be enabled When the system has been partitioned ALL areas will automatically arm in STAY Mode 1 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 159 Consumer Options 1 LOCATION 669 Software Version 1 10 Only 2 Description Entry Guard Delay In STAY Mode Audible Alarm In STAY Mode Allowed User Code Required To Isolate Zones Codepad Extinguish Mode Allowed Table 110 Consumer Options 1 1 10 Only 1 Entry Guard Delay In STAY Mode If this option has been selected all instant and handover zones will have an entry delay time as programmed in LOCATION 638 639 on page 141 when armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Zone Type Entry Time When In STAY Mode Table 111 Entry Guard Delay Timer In STAY Mode 2 Audible Alarm In STAY Mode This option will need to be enabled if audible alarms are required when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 4 User Code Required To Isolate Zones If this option has been selected the procedure f
201. ndicator Event Description A All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed Zone 4 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 4 Zone 3 AWAY Indicator lluminates Alarm In Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Iluminates System Armed In AWAY Mode Table 16 Event Memory Recall Example Event Playback A beep and an illuminated indicator indicate each event Resetting a 24 hour alarm in the disarmed state is indicated by one beep only After the last event three beeps will be heard to indicate the end of playback The replay can be AWAY terminated at any time by pressing the button Note If the control panel has been powered down the memory of all events will be lost Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 48 Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual 4 Walk Test Mode Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly Before activating walk test mode isolate any zones that are not required for testing Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information How To Enter Walk Test Mode 1 Enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by 4 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash The codepad will beep once every second while the system is in the walk test mode 2 Unseal and seal the zones to be tested The codepad will sound a long beep while the horn speaker will sound a short beep every time
202. ng outputs via Safecom as this is already used to arm disarm the system via ST1000 software and CANNOT be CHANGED If Safecom is disabled or you don t wish to use the ST1000 software to remotely operate outputs programming Remote operation of outputs is done as normal ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 127 Output Event Types There are approximately ninety different output event types to choose from Each output event type is designated by two numbers These two numbers need to be programmed into the appropriate locations of the output being used to indicate when the output should operate Note All reset times are in reference to polarity 1 and 8 Reset times will vary depending on the polarity used 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 4 05 0 6 0 7 EDMSAT Satellite Siren Output 1 Only This output controls all functions of an EDMSAT satellite siren SS914 The option of speaker indication beeps will not operate via the EDMSAT for remote operations EDMSTHU Securitel Unit Output 2 Only This output controls all functions of an EDMSTU Securitel unit CS800 PRINTER Output 3 Only This output allows connection of a serial printer to be used to log all reports with a date and time stamp Refer to LOCATION 756 on page 89 to select the required baud rate that the serial printer will communicate System Armed This output will operate when the system i
203. ng this time the FAULT indicator will illuminate Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42 for further information on sensor watch faults Safecom RF J amming Delay LOCATION 772 0 Location Description 772 Increments of Minutes 0 15 minutes Table 85 RF Jamming Delay Time V2 00 This is used to set the amount of time that the safecom interface detects continuous signal before reporting RF Jamming to the base station receiver via the safecom network if it can t get through then the panel will attempt to report via the telephone line If reporting can not get through via the safecom network or via the telephone network then the fault indicator will illuminate Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 45 for further information Safecom RF Supervision Time LOCATION 773 oJ Location Description 773 Increments of Minutes 0 15 minutes Table 86 RF Supervision Time V2 02 The RF Supervision Time is used to monitor safecom activity within the same framer It is used to ensure that the receiver is not deaf in between status polls from the base station This is the time in minutes that the receiver must receive a valid safecom packet on the same framer before timing out If the RF Supervision Timer expires before a valid packet is received the system will initiate a back poll to validate that the ST1000 interface is truly not present If the back poll fails an RF Fail report is then sent to the base station receiver
204. nk Software CC816 This software package is designed for programming the So lut ion 16 control panels by either the direct link or remote connect methods All options and features can be accessed via this software as well as maintaining history and service reports Refer to LOCATION 663 on page 152 for enabling this feature Direct Link Cable CC808 The Solut ion 16 control panel has the ability to be programmed using the Alarm Link software without the need of a remote telephone line connection Using the direct link method one end of this cable plugs directly onto the AUXILIARY MODULE socket of the Solut ion 16 control panel with the other end going to a serial communications port of an IBM or compatible computer The control panel can be programmed in the same way as one would if a telephone line was used Eight Channel Output Board CC884 The eight channel output board is used to increase the available programmable outputs that can be operated from the control panel An additional eight outputs can be monitored using this expansion board Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 672 on page 163 to enable the eight channel output board Refer to Figure 17 Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 on page 198 for connection information Eight Zone Expansion Board 3K3 EOL CC885 This eight zone expansion board provides terminations for zones 9 16 when the configuration of split EOL resistors is not suitable 3K3 EOL resistors must b
205. not operate unless Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 amp STAY Mode 2 has been enabled Method One How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 1 1 Enter your cone followed by the STAY J button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone CODE STAY OR CODE AWAY Method Two A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone If this is the case a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system To enable method two Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 161 will need to be enabled Note Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 32 How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 1 1 Hold down the istay J button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system will be disarmed STAY Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 38 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 STAY Mode 2 is when the system has been armed with particular zones automatically isolated These zones are programmed via the Master Code holder When there is a need to arm the system perimeter only this mode is extremely handy It automatically disables the interior detection zones allowing for movement within the protected area while at the same time arming the perimeter zones For S
206. nstallation without having to change the EOL resistors This feature also increases the security of the system as there are eleven possible EOL resistor values that can be used This makes it extremely difficult for anyone to tamper with the system The EOL resistor value for the zones can be chosen from any of the different values listed If 16 zones are required an EDM Zone Expansion Board will be required to be fitted to the control panel and enabled in LOCATION 672 on page 163 If split EOL resistors have been selected the control panel will look for sixteen EOL resistors consisting of 3K3 resistors for zones 8 and 6K8 resistors connected in parallel for zones 9 16 The zone termination on the PCB becomes the termination for zones and 9 Note Caution should be exercised when using split EOL resistors to create 16 zones This configuration is only suitable for normally closed contacts If normally open contacts are used as is the case with most types of smoke detectors a short circuit on one zone will trigger both zones connected in parallel If there is a requirement to use a normally open contact with split EOL program either the primary or secondary zone as not used If split EOL resistors are not suitable there is a choice of two eight zone expansion boards that can be purchased and fitted to the control panel The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 can be programmed for different resistor values whereas the Eight Zone Expans
207. nt Code Hundreds Digit Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 61 Access Denied Locations Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or An Access Denied report Contact ID Event Code 421 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in LOCATION 338 on page 101 This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 666 on page 155 if you require this alarm to be silent Note Restore signals for this event are not transmitted If an Access Denied report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 487 with a zero AC Fail LOCATION 488 491 3011 Location Description 488 Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 489 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 491 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 62 AC Fail Locations An AC Loss report Contact ID Event Code 301 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for two minutes If you require an AC Loss report to be transmitted to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for 1 hour enable Option 4 in LOCATION 667 on page 156 A restore signal
208. nual Timing Of Outputs The timing of outputs is calculated by a time base and a multiplier These two values play different roles depending on the polarity selected When programming pulsing outputs both the On and Off times can be set One shot polarities can be timed between 200 ms up to 99 hours in duration Time Multiplier Base Tens Units The maximum value that can be programmed in the two multiplier locations is 9 9 Option Time Base 1 Minute 60 Seconds A O 1 Hour 60 Minutes Table 72 Time Base Settings The time base settings can be set to only one of the values listed in Table 72 Time Base Settings This is not like other options where more than one can be selected and the option numbers added together to give various combinations The multiplier value is a two digit decimal number from 00 99 For greater accuracy use 60 seconds for 1 minute intervals and use 60 minutes for one hour intervals Pulsing Polarities When calculating pulsing polarities both the On and Off times need to be set The duration or On time of an output is determined by selecting only one of the time bases from Table 72 Time Base Settings on page 136 This means there are only four On times to choose from The Off time is calculated as a multiple of the On time by choosing a decimal number between 0 and 99 If an output is required to operate for 200 ms every five seconds program the time settings as follows
209. o alternate route V2 02 2 Power Up In Disarmed State Re boot If this option has been enabled the control panel will power up in the disarmed state once the battery and AC mains have been reconnected once the system has been powered down EDM does not recommend this feature 4 Internal Crystal To Keep Time V1 40 If this option has been enabled it will force the control panel not to use the mains frequency as a time base to keep time The control panel will use the internal crystal XTAL to keep track of time This option is useful in countries that do not have a constant mains frequency Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 168 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Options 6 LOCATION 898 V1 33 3 Description Busy Tone Detection For Domestic Dialling Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Dialling Extend Acknowledge Tone Detection From 30 60 Seconds If Battery Fails Restrict Battery Test Only On Arming V1 35 Table 118 System Options 6 1 Busy Tone Detection For Domestic Dialling This option is valid only when the control panel has been set up for Domestic Dialling Format When this option has been enabled the dialling algorithm will check for a busy tone This is particularly important in that the control panel will only make 3 valid call attempts A valid attempt is signified by the absence of a busy tone 2 Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Diall
210. ocation 320 327 Page 101 PEEP E Location 328 335 Auxiliary Code 2 Page 101 aspsfasfisfas isfas 2 Location 336 337 Day Alarm Mask Location 336 Page 110 H Location 338 Code Retries Page 101 D Location 339 EOL Resistor Value 1 1K 2 1K5 3 2K2 4 3K3 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Split EOL 8K3 6K8 Page 112 4 For 16 Zone Operation Location 340 467 Zones Zone 3 N one 6 N one 9 bi l N one 12 bi N one 15 bi Zone Type Location 356 363 Lt ofofola sfoja Location 380 387 Location 404 411 Location 428 43 DOOBEon ol Location 452 459 DOOBBEOE Kl Hd 201 E E 22 E Zone Option Zone Pulse Count 1 Zone 1 1 Zone5 2 Zone 2 Location 337 2 Zone 6 4 Zone 4 Zone 7 8 Zone 4 8 Zone 8 5 3K9 9 10K 6 4K7 10 12K 7 5K6 11 22K 8 6K8 12 Reserved Zone 1 Location 340 347 Zone 2 N one 4 DI Location 364 371 l N one 7 N on bi one 13 one 16 N N Location 388 395 ldilslst 10 Location 412 41 Location 436 44 Location 460 467 Ke oo ofojofofajefoft Zone Pulse Count Time Event Code Hundreds Digit Event Code Tens Digit Location 348 355 Oldidlatla one 5 Location 372 379 Z Oldddlatl one 8 Location 396 403 fo fofa fs ai N Zone 11 Location 420 427 fofofofoli 3 oa Zone 1
211. ode 307 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when a zone has not been triggered during the Sensor Watch Time in LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 This report will continue to be transmitted according to the frequency of the sensor watch time until the fault has been rectified Note Software Version 1 10 1 31 transmitted Sensor Trouble as Contact ID Event Code 383 From Software Version 1 32 the Contact ID Event Code was changed to 307 Self Test Failure To clear the fault and stop any further reporting the zone that registered the fault must be unsealed and resealed again Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 to set the number of days a zone may remain sealed before registering as a fault Refer to Zone Options on page 107 to enable a zone to be monitored by the sensor watch feature Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Self Test Failure report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 503 with a zero Open Close Reports For Area 1 LOCATION 504 505 89 Location Description 504 Opening Report Code 505 Closing Report Code Table 66 Open Close Locations An Opening report Contact ID Event Code 401 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed from AWAY Mode A Closing report Contact ID Event Code 401 is transmitted at the end of exit time when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode If an expanded format has been selec
212. odepad Tamper To Be Silent 1 Area 1 Codepad Connected To Main Data Terminal 2 Modem Module Required For Alarm Link Operation 4 AC Fail In One Hour Disabled After 2 Minutes 8 Pulse Count Handover Allowed 1 Delay Audible Alarm Until Communication Complete 2 Reset Alarm Outputs From Any Area Partitioned Systems Only 4 Auto Arm In AWAY Mode 8 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 1 Delay Audible Alarm Until Communication Complete 2 Reset Alarm Outputs From Any Area Partitioned Systems Only 4 Ignore AC Mains Fail V1 30 8 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 217 Page 144 L v D e oO A N Le Page 152 L Page 153 L Page 154 L Page 155 E Page 156 L Page 157 E Page 158 L ISSUE222 DOC 218 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Location 669 V1 10 Only Page 159 Consumer Options 1 1 Entry Guard Time In STAY Mode 2 Audible Alarm In STAY Mode Allowed 4 User Code Required To Isolate Zones 8 Codepad Extinguish Mode Allowed Location 669 V1 20 Page 160 Consumer Options 1 1 STAY LED To Display Day Alarm ON OFF State 2 Audible Alarm In STAY Mode Allowed 4 AUX LED To Display Dialler On Line 8 Codepad Extinguish Mode Allowed Location 670 Page 161 Consumer Options 2 1 User Code 0 AWAY Function To Arm Disarm All Areas 2 Single Button Arming AWAY STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2
213. ogrammer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external programming key has been connected Failing to do this may corrupt the control panel s memory If this happens the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory Example To enter the Installer s Programming Mode enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by the button The factory default Installers Code is 1 2 3 A Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmers display will show the current data stored in LOCATION 000 To move to a particular programming location enter the followed by the button The data for the new location will now be displayed To move to the next location press the button This will step you to the next location and the data in that location will now be displayed via the ZONE indicators If you press the button without previously entering a location number the system will step back one location To change data in the current location enter the new value 0 15 followed by the button This will store the new data into the location and still leave you still positioned at the same location To proceed to the next location press the button The next locations data will now be displayed To exit the Installer s Programming Mode enter command 9 6 Q followed b
214. olut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 32 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Indicators and Operations The Codepad The codepad is the communications interface between you and your Solucion alarm system It allows you to issue commands and offers both visual and audible indications that guide you through the general operation The codepad incorporates numerous indicators There are ZONE indicators that are used to show the condition of each zone and four others for general status The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that will be seen STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY Figure 1 CP5 Eight Zone Codepad Zone Indicators The ZONE indicators are used to show the status of the zones The following table list the various circumstances that the indicators will display i e Zone Sealed Zone Unsealed Indicator Definition P On Zone Is Unsealed Off Zone Is Sealed 0 25 Sec On 0 25 Sec Off 1 Sec On 1 Sec Off Table 6 Zone Indicators AWAY Indicator The AWAY indicator is used to inform you that the system is armed in the AWAY Mode Indicator Definition PO System Is Armed In AWAY Mode Off System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode Table 7 AWAY Indicator Functions STAY Indicator The STAY indicator is used to indicate that the system is armed in STAY Mo
215. on When the control panel has activated into alarm it will commence dialling the first programmed telephone number If a busy or engaged tone has been detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the second telephone number if one is programmed The first call however will be counted as one unsuccessful dialling attempt If the second telephone number is also busy or an engaged tone is detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the third telephone number if one is programmed If a busy tone is not detected the control panel will assume that the phone has been answered and will begin sending its transmission The transmission consists of the recorded voice message repeating itself for a period of about 90 seconds followed by two beeps Note A maximum of 6 calls per alarm event will be made when the control panel has been set up for Synthesised Voice Dialling Format This count includes any unsuccessful calls The counter will be reset if the zone retriggers and a further 6 attempts will be made The control panel will stop dialling after 6 attempts or 3 successful calls or a user code has been entered from the remote codepad How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling Without DTMF Command Module Fitted Once the call has been received if the call is not acknowledged once the message has completed by pressing the button on the Phone Controller CC911 for three seconds or alternatively by p
216. on does not perform as it should To clear up just what anti jamming is and how it works needs some understanding of Telephone Networks In America either of the two parties i e the one who initiated the call or the one receiving the call can clear the line by placing the hand piece back on the hook If you pick up the hand piece again dial tone will be received and you will be able to make a new call immediately This is not so here in Australia In Australia only the calling party can immediately terminate the call If you receive a call from someone and hang up picking the hand piece back up again to make a new call only reconnects you to the original caller It will not be possible to make another call until the original caller hangs up or you hang up phone for ninety seconds or longer So you see Australia is very different and needs a special form of anti jamming to suit our telephone network There are control panels on the market that after making a few call attempts that fail simply hang up and wait for ninety seconds or so in an attempt to clear the jamming incoming call This may work in some instances where the caller is not a genuine burglar and is not deliberately trying to jam the control panel With this simple method of hanging up for ninety seconds we have not only delayed the alarm signal for this time but also the time taken for the original failed call attempts which could easily total 4 minutes This is bad enough in its own rig
217. one Only zones 8 can be used as day alarm zones The STAY indicator can be programmed to indicate whether day alarm has been turned On or Off When day alarm has been turned On the STAY indicator will flash every three seconds Refer to LOCATION 669 on page 160 to enable this option Monitoring of zones 9 16 can be achieved by programming an output to mimic a zone Refer to Output Event Types on page 127 for further information Day Alarm In Partitioning Day alarm operates independently for each area when the system has been partitioned Any area can turn day alarm On or Off without effecting another area Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 112 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual EOL Resistor Value LOCATION 339 4 Option Resistor Value Option Resistor Value OK Brown Black Orange 2K Brown Red Orange 22K Red Red Orange a 3K3 Orange Orange Black Brown 1 Reserved Ji Wellow Viole Re Ps 6K Blue Grey Black Brown 1 Table 54 EOL Resistor Values Reserved 3K3 6K8 Split EOL For 16 Zones a 3 Reserved Vi The control panel has the ability to be programmed for different values of EOL resistors This feature is only applicable to zones one through to eight This is a global parameter and will effect all eight zones simultaneously It gives the ability to fit the Solution 16 control panel into an existing i
218. onnection may be required for lightning protection on equipment that is connected to phone lines or for safety reasons such as earthing of metal enclosures ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 189 Solution Codepad Mimic Board CC820 The Solution Codepad Mimic Board CC820 has been designed to allow you to have a separate output indicator for each indicator found on the remote codepad This will be useful to remotely display system status information Solution Relay Output Interface CC892 The Solution Relay Output Interface CC892 has been designed to allow up to an additional 8 relay outputs to be connected to a Solution control panel This will be useful to remotely display system status information The 3 way DIP switch on the board is used to select the data that is to be displayed on the relays Multiple interfaces may be connected in parallel for different data displays 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface FA101 The 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface FA101 has been designed to allow high quality 2 wire 24 volt DC smoke detectors to be easily connected to the Solution range of control panels The interface provides the 24 volts required to power the smoke detector and also provides a relay output that is used to trigger the control panel Multiple detectors may be connected to the same interface Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 This interface was designed to allow simple inter
219. ons has been enabled in LOCATION 663 Dialler Active This output will operate when the communication dialler is on line The output will reset when the communication dialler has released the telephone line Ring Detect New Software Version 1 37 This output will operate when an incoming call has been detected The output will reset when the ringing has stopped or when the call has been answered Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 132 RI RI RI RI RI RI LA DA D W WWW DA ja ps CP NOU RI D u Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Mimic Zone 1 3 Lej Mimic Zone 9 Mimic Zone 2 3 04 Mimic Zone 10 Mimic Zone 3 3 L5 Mimic Zone 11 Mimic Zone 4 4 O Mimic Zone 12 Mimic Zone 5 d l Mimic Zone 13 Mimic Zone 6 4 2 gt Mimic Zone 14 Mimic Zone 7 4 23 Mimic Zone 15 Mimic Zone 8 d A Mimic Zone 16 These output types will mimic the zone inputs The output will operate when the zone is unsealed and will reset when the zone has resealed They will operate regardless of the zone type chosen i e A zone Not Used can still operate a mimic output This feature operates when the system is armed or disarmed Global Chime This output will operate when any zones programmed as Chime have triggered The output will reset when the zone has resealed Zone Not Sealed This output will operate whenever a burglary zone is unsealed Chime zones will not operate this ou
220. or Alarm Link Operation AC Fail After 1 Hour Disabled AC Fail After 2 Minutes Zone Pulse Count Handover Allowed Table 107 System Options 3 1 Area 1 Codepad Connected To Main Data Terminal If this option has been enabled the DATA terminal on the panel will be configured to transmit status information that is relevant only to Area 1 A CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad would be used in this instance If this option is not enabled the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will need to be used because information for all areas will be transmitted on the DATA terminal An advantage in using this option is that it allows you to configure a system into separate areas while still leaving the maximum number of programmable outputs available for other uses 2 Modem Module Required For Alarm Link Operation If this option has been enabled the control panel will use the external plug in Modem Module CC811 for remote programming via the Alarm Link Software CC816 This option should only be enabled in situations where the telephone line is susceptible to noise If this option is not enabled the control panel will use its own built in modem 4 AC Fail After 1 Hour Disabled AC Fail After 2 Minutes If this option has been enabled the MAINS indicator will begin to flash and an AC Loss signal will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains has been disconnected continuously for more than 60 minutes If
221. or isolating zones changes from the method of standard isolating to one that requires the use of a valid user code Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information 8 Codepad Extinguish Mode Allowed If this option has been enabled all indicators on the remote codepads will extinguish if a button is not pressed for 60 seconds The indicators will illuminate when there is an alarm except a silent alarm when a button is pressed on the codepad when the AC mains fail beeps or if the Entry Time has been activated Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 160 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Consumer Options 1 LOCATION 669 V1 20 2 Description STAY LED To Display Day Alarm ON OFF Status Audible Alarm In STAY Mode Allowed AUX LED To Display Dialler On Line Codepad Extinguish Mode Allowed Table 112 Consumer Options 1 V1 20 1 STAY LED To Display Day Alarm ON OFF Status If this option has been selected the STAY indicator will be used to display when day alarm has been enabled The STAY indicator will blink once every 3 seconds while day alarm is active 2 Audible Alarm In STAY Mode Allowed This option will need to be enabled if audible alarms are required when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 4 AUX LED To Display Dialler On Line If this option has been enabled the AUX indicator on a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will ill
222. orn speaker output with the common terminal being COM There are fifteen different sounds available for the horn speaker Refer to Siren Sound Rate on page 146 for more information A maximum of two 8 ohm horn speakers may be connected in parallel Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 195 Terminal Definition N O COMM N C 12V GND 12V Z1 Z2 Z3 ZA 12V GND Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8 12V 12V GND These relay contacts are fully programmable as with Outputs 1 2 and 3 They are factory defaulted as an alarm output Sirens Running Event Type 1 15 The N O contact is the connection point for the positive side of a DC siren such as a piezo screamer The negative side of the DC siren needs to be connected to the GND terminal A link JP7 is provided on the PCB for connecting the COM terminal to either GND or 12V This link should be connected to 12V as shown in Figure 13 Solution 16 Wiring Diagram on page 196 The relay is rated at 1 Amp 30 VDC These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment The total continuous stand by current on the system should not exceed 500 mA maximum combined external load is 1 Amp with backup battery These terminals are zones one to four and their common terminal is 12V All normally closed contacts are to be connected in series with the EOL resistor where all normally open contacts are to be connected in parallel wi
223. ort had occurred ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 167 Safecom Reporting Options LOCATION 896 V2 00 6 Option Description Safecom Communication Reporting Disabled Disarming From ST1000 Base Allowed Reserved Arming From ST1000 Base Allowed 1 Safecom Communications Reporting Disabled Programming this option will disable safecom communication control panel will only report via the telephone line to the base station 2 Arming From ST1000 Base Allowed If this option has been enabled the control panel can be armed via the Base Station on the safecom terminal 4 Disarming From ST1000 Base Allowed If this option has been enabled the control panel can be disarmed via the Base Station on the safecom terminal 8 Reserved Note If Option 1 is Programmed and Dialler is enabled in location 663 the Solution 16 will report via the telephone line System Options 5 LOCATION 897 V1 37 0 Description Send Test Report At End Of Siren Time Power Up In Disarmed State Re Boot Internal Crystal To Keep Time V1 40 1 Send Test Report At End Of Siren Time Enabling this option will force the control panel to transmit a test report after the siren has reset This can be used to indicate to the monitoring station that the control panel has not been tampered with during the alarm period Note Test reports will only be sent via the safecom network if there is n
224. orts will be transmitted on the Subscriber ID Number allocated to that particular area Subscriber ID Numbers and Open Close reports must be programmed for all areas 4 Open Close Reports In STAY Mode 1 Allowed If open and close reports are required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 this option will need to be enabled 8 Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed V1 31 This option needs to be enabled if the answering machine bypass feature is required to operate only when the system has been armed When the system has been disarmed the control panel will not answer any incoming calls This option is beneficial in high telephone traffic installations where the control panel could answer an incoming call Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 176 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Open Close Reports For Area 1 LOCATION 504 505 89 Location Description Opening Report Code For Area 1 Closing Report Code For Area 1 Table 121 Area 1 Open Close Report Locations Open Close Reports For Area 2 LOCATION 674 675 00 Location Description Opening Report Code For Area 2 Closing Report Code For Area 2 Table 122 Area 2 Open Close Report Locations Open Close Reports For Area 3 LOCATION 676 677 00 Location Description Opening Report Code For Area 3 Closing Report Code For Area 3 Table 123 Area 3 Open Close Report Locations Open Cl
225. ose Reports For Area 4 LOCATION 678 679 00 Location Description Opening Report Code For Area 4 Closing Report Code For Area 4 Table 124 Area 4 Open Close Report Locations ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 177 Subscriber ID Number For Area 1 LOCATION 052 055 0000 Location Description Area Subscriber ID Number Thousands Digit Area 1 Subscriber ID Number Tens Digit Area 1 Subscriber ID Number Units Digit Table 125 Area 1 Subscriber ID Number Locations Subscriber ID Number For Area 2 LOCATION 680 683 0000 Area 1 Subscriber ID Number Hundreds Digit Location Description Table 126 Area 2 Subscriber ID Number Locations Subscriber ID Number For Area 3 LOCATION 684 687 0000 Location Description Area 3 Subscriber ID Number Thousands Digit Area 3 Subscriber ID Number Hundreds Digit Area 3 Subscriber ID Number Tens Digit Area 3 Subscriber ID Number Units Digit Table 127 Area 3 Subscriber ID Number Locations Subscriber ID Number For Area 4 LOCATION 688 691 0000 Location Description Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Thousands Digit Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Tens Digit Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Units Digit Table 128 Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Locations Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Hundreds Digit Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 178 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom In
226. perate when a 24 hour fire zone is triggered The output will reset once a valid user code has been entered or when siren run time expires If the control panel has been partitioned a user code allocated to another area may reset this output 2 D Fire Alarm Latching This output will operate when a 24 hour fire zone has triggered and will reset when the system has been armed or disarmed If the system has been partitioned the output will reset when any area has been armed or disarmed 2 5 7 Fire Alarm Verification New Software Version 1 37 This feature is used on some commercial fire control panels to reduce false alarms on smoke detectors It is conceptually very similar to zone pulse count as used in some motion detectors Basically a fire zone is allotted a pulse count of 3 pulses over a period of 3 minutes If the smoke detector trips the voltage to the smoke detector is disconnected for 15 seconds and then reapplied No alarm has registered If within 3 minutes of the first trigger the unit triggers again no alarm will be registered and the voltage to the smoke detector will again be disconnected for 15 seconds and then reapplied If a third trigger is detected within 3 minutes of the first trigger i e 3 pulses in 3 minutes a fire alarm will be registered Power to the smoke detector will be maintained to facilitate unit identification via the detector memory This output should be connected to the negative side of any fire smoke
227. ps will be heard and both the STAY and AWAY indicators will flash simultaneously If a long beep is heard check the control panel for alarm memory The combination of the MAINS and ZONE indicators will indicate the data stored in the first location of the Primary Telephone Number LOCATION 000 Data Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS Value Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator SES Ce 6 7 d lt Table 2 Zone Indicators When Programming SIS Example To enter Installer s Programming Mode enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by the AWAY button The factory default Installer s Code is 1 234 Two beeps will be heard and the codepad will display the current data stored in LOCATION 000 To go to a particular location enter the Location NUMBER required followed by the AWAY button The data of the new location will now be displayed To move to the next location press the aal button This will step you to the next location and the data in that location will be displayed via the ZONE indicators If you press the LSTAYJ button without previously entering a location number the system will step back one location To change data at the current location enter the new value 0 15 followed by the LSTAYJ button This will store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same location To proceed to the next
228. put will operate when a dynamic battery test detects that the battery has failed or the battery voltage has fallen below 10 5 volts The dynamic battery test is performed every four hours from when the system has been powered up or every time the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 This output will reset only after a dynamic battery test reports the backup battery is OK Horn Speaker Fail If Option 4 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 has been enabled this output will operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected The output will reset when the horn speaker has been reconnected Sensor Watch Alarm This output will operate when the sensor watch count has been reached Refer to Zone Options on page 107 for more information on programming zones for sensor watch Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 for setting how many days before a zone can register as a faulty sensor watch zone Codepad Medical Alarm New Software Version 1 37 This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been initiated by pressing the 7 and H buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Codepad Fire Alarm New Software Version 1 37 This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been initiated by pressing the 4 and6 buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Codepad Panic Alarm
229. quired as well as how often to transmit the report Test reports are transmitted on a daily basis ranging from every day to every ninety nine days Refer to Installer Code Functions on page 46 to set the first test report Note If you do not require Test reports program the repeat interval in LOCATIONS 510 511 as zero Test reports will only be sent via the safecom network if there is no alternate route V2 02 Test Report Options Option Description Send Test Reports Only If The System Is Armed Send Test Reports On All Active Diallers Partitioning Only Table 68 Test Report Options 1 Send Test Reports Only If The System Is Armed If this option has been enabled test reports will only be transmitted when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 Itis no longer necessary to send a test report as well as an opening and closing report every day During the working week most commercial premises would be open and therefore a test report is not necessary as Open and Close reports would have been transmitted On the weekend however the control panel would be armed and thus test reports would be sent at the programmed time 2 Send Test Reports On All Active Diallers Partitioned Systems Only This location enables a Test report to be transmitted to the base station receiver for each of the Subscriber ID Numbers that have been programmed when the control panel has been partitioned ISSUE222
230. r STAY Mode 1 Once the control panel has automatically armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 the output will reset To program the Pre Arming Alert Time refer to LOCATION 654 on page 144 Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry Warning This output will operate during exit time when the control panel has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 if all zones are sealed This output event type will reset once exit time has expired The next time this output event type will operate will be during entry time and will reset once entry time has expired or the system has been disarmed This output event type will also operate if a zone has triggered when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 if the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed in LOCATION 638 639 on page 141 Exit Warning This output operates during exit time when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset once exit time has expired Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 128 0 8 0 9 AE 0 a2 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 4 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Exit Warning Finished This output operates when the exit time has expired if the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Kiss Off After End Of Exit Time This output will operate after the first succ
231. r information Patrolman Code Code To Isolate This priority level allows the Patrolman Code to disarm the system once an alarm has occurred Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set A Patrolman Code can always arm the system Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information Master Code Functions Are Allowed This priority level allows arming and disarming of the control panel and the ability to carry out any of the Master Code Functions described on page 50 More than one user code can be allocated to this priority level Master Code Functions Are Allowed Code To Isolate This priority level allows arming and disarming of the control panel and the ability to carry out any of the Master Code Functions described on page 50 More than one user code can be allocated to this priority level Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 100 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual User Code 1 Location 064 071 User Code 2 Location 072 079 ell llb Il fsfsfasfashis isfis User Code 3 Location 080 087 User Code 4 Location 088 095 User Code 5 Location 096 PSEEEE S D BEEBE SS bP BES Ep sps User Code 8 Location 120 25 15 25 15 U
232. r the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format 3 Press the LAWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 6 away Example If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1996 at 10 00 PM program the date and time as follows MASTER CODE 6 away 04 14 04 1 9 64 2 2 0 0 7 Turning Day Alarm On and Off Software Version 1 10 Only Day alarm enables a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed state Indications are available via any of the programmable outputs including the codepad buzzer How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Enter your masten cone followed by 7 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Enter your MasteR cone followed by 7 and the AWAYJ button Two beeps will be heard MASTER CODE J AWAY ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 59 8 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones This function allows the Master Code holder to select which zones are to be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 the zones programmed using this function will be automatically isolated until the system has been powered down or the Master Code holder changes the zones numbers required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 This function
233. r when the system is next disarmed which ever happens first A 24 hour zone will only transmit a restore signal when it has resealed The trouble code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Format It has no effect on Contact ID Format as a Sensor Trouble report will always be reported on event code 380 A Sensor Trouble report will be transmitted on which ever dialler channel the respective zone has been allocated to when the control panel has been partitioned Note If Sensor Trouble reports are not required program LOCATION 472 475 with a zero Zone Trouble and Zone Trouble Restore reports will not be transmitted via securitel for software version 1 10 and software version 1 20 Zone Trouble Report 9 16 LOCATION 474 475 99 Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 58 Zone Trouble Codes For Zones 9 16 Refer to Zone Trouble Report 1 8 for more information Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 116 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Codepad Duress LOCATION 476 479 1211 Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 477 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Ho Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 59 Codepad Duress Locations
234. ramming Key This command erases all data from the programming key How To Erase The Programming Key Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel Enter command 9 D 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming keys data has now been deleted Enter command 9 6 OQ followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Now remove the programming key from the control panel Ay Fe NP How To Erase The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position 2 Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 9 6 4 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming keys data has now been deleted 5 Enter command 9 6 OQ followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode 6 Now disconnect the programming key from the hand held programmer ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 27 Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format Command 965 has been added to make the set up of the Domestic Dialling Format a one step operation Refer to page 78 for more information on Domestic Reporting After Installer s Programming Mode h
235. rd and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format 3 Press the LAWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 6 AWAY Example If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1996 at 10 00 PM program the date and time as follows MASTER CODE 6 away 0 4 14 04 1 9 64 2 2 0 0 o Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 150 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 152 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Option Bits When programming these locations you will notice that there are four options per location You may select one two three or all four of these options however only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Program a seven 7 if you require options 1 2 and 4 simultaneously i e 1 2 4 7 Dialler Options 1 LOCATION 663 5 Description Dialler Reporting Functions 2 Remote Arming Via The Telephone Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm A O Upload Download Via Alarm Link Table 102 Dialler Options 1 1 Dialler Reporting Functions If this option has been enabled the dialler will function for all operations
236. re programming this location ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Base Station Information 93 Secondary Telephone Number LOCATION 016 031 0000000000000000 Refer to the Primary Telephone Number for programming information LOCATION 032 047 0000000000000000 This location contains the telephone number that will be called when Upload Download is requested or the number 6 button is held down to initiate a modem call from the control panel to establish a communications link with the remote computer The computer must be running the Alarm Link Software CC816 and will need to be set to Waiting For An Incoming Call The Callback Telephone Number is also required to be programmed if Remote Connect With Callback Verification on page 70 is required Dialling Format LOCATION 048 1 The method for dialling telephone numbers is entered here Options 3 and 6 will alternate the dialling sequence between DTMF and Decadic if the call to the base station receiver was unsuccessful Caution should be exercised when selecting the dialling method Only use the Australian method if the control panel is to be connected to the Australian Telecommunications Network The International DTMF dialling option should only be used in those countries that allow both the caller and the receiver to terminate the phone call Using the incorrect format will disable EDM s patent Telephone Anti Jamming feature Option Dialling Form
237. ree options to suit your application Dialler Options 2 LOCATION 664 0 Description Open Close Reports Only After Alarm First To Open Last To Close Reporting Partitioned Systems Only Open Close Reports In STAY Mode Allowed Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed V1 31 Table 120 Dialler Options 2 1 Open Close Reports Only After Alarm This option requires Open Close Reports in LOCATION 504 505 programmed on page 120 for it to be effective An open report will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed after an alarm has occurred When the system has been armed a closing report will be transmitted This feature can also be used in conjunction with the Patrolman Code Refer to Patrolman Code on page 99 for more information If the system has been partitioned an Open Close report will only be transmitted on the area that the alarm had occurred Note If the system has been disarmed when an alarm has occurred only a closing report will be transmitted when the system has been armed 2 First To Open Last To Close Reporting Partitioned Systems Only This option needs to be enabled if only one Open Close report is required when the system has been partitioned Rather than having individual Open Close reports for each area a closing report will be transmitted only when ALL areas have been armed and an opening report will be transmitted as soon as one area has been disarmed The rep
238. reegt Aide Ed SES EE 81 How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling Without DTMF Command Module Fitted A 81 How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling With DTMF Command Module Fred 81 Operation Of The Voice Module isisisi cc ssgsshsesepscts sehave soesdsnssietavasbensicesstebsvesces sgensegebigestesstvesbtedessctesdsyssesesenecdesepvbss cer 82 Recording The Voice Message ez fois toss chsncsdeceuseesiguspsuydlaendusedscesudevocneatanderayeuesbat a area a eap Ea E hee AEREE ioeie 82 Replay The EE 82 Connection Of The Voice Module s itc c si ce ccsccs teen erccse han E E E EENE a EEN EEN 83 Basic Pager Format Reporting sesno scescesuesavessteeen cisessesbeasbeg EEES ETOP EEE EEE E TEPEE E EE EErEE ES OEE EE r TEES EE ar En EEr 84 PET Alpha Pager Reportin E enn a a a a N a E e 85 Programming and Hardware Requirements 0 ecesceseesecsseceeeceeeseeeeeeeececeesecesecsaecsaecsaecsaecseeeseseseseeeeeseeeseeseeseenaes 85 Telecom Access Telephone Number 85 PET Alpha Pager Messages ci c 3 seseetsssessisbssesiet tase st jetivasvets oa a S Eror rara O EESE soa OPERE a aspect se tasseostsavessssdasssossevenssges 86 PET Alpha Pager Pass word Siesoo oeeo einne nep eei e ee ee Ea ES ea NEn E Sea ein eseis aE e Se 87 Converting ASCII Characters To Hexadecimal 00 0 0 cece cece ceeeeseeeesscesecesecesecsecsaecsaecseecaecsaecaeecseseaeseeeeeeeeeesseeeseenaes 88 PET Alpha Pager ID Number ioi r E E E E ea A E A A ee 88 Logging System Events
239. remote computer back to make contact Remote Connect With Callback Verification Remote connect with callback verification offers the highest degree of data security by incorporating a two level security check The first is the Installer Code combined with the Subscriber ID Number needs to match that of the control panel Secondly the control panel will callback the programmed callback phone number to establish the valid connection The Callback Telephone Number is the phone line that the modem and computer has been connected to LOCATION 032 047 must be programmed with the Callback Telephone Number and Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 152 will need to be enabled ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 72 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Reporting Formats When making use of the control panel s dialling and communication features there are a number of transmission formats available Refer to LOCATION 050 on page 94 to set the required transmission format The Solution 16 control panel comes factory default to report in the Contact ID Format Contact ID Format This format can identify hundreds of protection zones by their unique code and provides a single digit event qualifier and a three digit event code that quickly identifies the condition being reported Subscriber ID Number Qualifier Event Code Group Number Point ID Number E BEE E EE E 6G EE Four
240. ressing the button on the touch tone telephone for 3 seconds the control panel will commence dialling the next telephone number If the call has been acknowledged the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling With DTMF Command Module Fitted Once the call has been received if the call is not acknowledged by pressing the button on the telephone at any time during the message playback the control panel will then hang up after the message has completed and commence dialling the next telephone number If the call has been acknowledged the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 82 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Operation Of The Voice Module The unit has two modes of operation being 1 Record Mode Crystal Earpiece Not Plugged In 2 Replay Mode Crystal Earpiece Plugged In Recording The Voice Message In the RECORD mode the crystal earpiece should not be connected To record a message on the voice module press and hold the Record Play switch At the same time commence speaking into the microphone slowly and clearly dictating your desired message The status indicator will illuminate as the Record Replay switch is pressed and will remain on while ever the switch is being held in or until the maximum recording time of 16 second
241. rogramming key can hold all your common configuration data such as monitoring station telephone numbers and zone reporting channels etc Modem Module CC811 This modem module is required when the control panel is to report to a PET Alpha Pocket Pager Protocol using the CCITT frequency Connection Ensure that all power is disconnected from the Solut ion 16 control panel Locate the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the printed circuit board and connect the modem module ensuring that the orientation of the triangular markings on the printed circuit board correspond to those on the modem module Modem Module CC811B This modem module is required when the control panel is to report to a PET Alpha Pocket Pager Protocol using the BELL frequency Connection Ensure that all power is disconnected from the Solut ion 16 control panel Locate the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the printed circuit board and connect the modem module ensuring that the orientation of the triangular markings on the printed circuit board correspond to those on the modem module Voice Module CC888 The voice module has been designed so that a clear concise voice message can be transmitted by the control panel to the domestic phone numbers of your choice when an alarm condition occurs This allows the person receiving the call to easily understand that the control panel at your home or office has been activated and that action is required This voice message is pre recorded by t
242. rsresrreresrent 66 Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module 67 Operation Software From Version 110 67 Operation Software From Version LIUKdesteetee gedet edel 67 Upload Download Via Alarm Link Software 69 Direct ConneCtcs iv ss ties DEE ct As ev E a ee ee A ee eS 69 Remote COnMeCE eseu enee TASEN EEN EE coat sevbabts ts deste scas apugensten tee dads tapastendspesssobeascdesess 70 REPORTING FORMATS sc enee Ee Enge 72 Contact E EE 72 PwentCodeg eerste EE sk inks coca EEN ee REENEN E 73 Point ID Codes css ive sess weet ote eae SP het EE rae EE EE DEE a alan at 74 General Reporting Format 3s5 26s feces eeh 75 Ke 71 How To Program and Set Up Becuptel isoiset sasen rear e ere r EEE E ER SOS EE SEET rE rE es ei Si 77 Securitelsand art tsciesecsvasGece ties eeck teste Ee EE EE Ee EE 77 Domestic Reporting sccicsivecs Zuerich Add Ee AE See ache Ee Eege 78 Programming Domestic Reportin sinnn ira a A E E A E E E S RG 78 Domestic Dialling Operation E 79 Acknowledge Domestyc Dalle gi tee aide Sied t ge degdetehk eene iee bss tes ENESE op Ee Ee Ee NO E N EEr ENES ee NEEE EEE nes 79 Synthesised Voice Reportin Ek Nee has eiee iriti EE E ES E EEEE EEE e EE E AE EEE E 80 How To Set Up The Control Panel For Synthesised Voice Format eeesesesssseessereresreesesreressesressesreeresrerrsreneeseesreeres 80 How To Disable Synthesised Voice Dialling Using The Master Code 81 Synthesised Voice Dialling Operation
243. rther details Is determined by a time base and a multiplier Refer to Timing on page 136 for further details Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs Output Configurations Output 1 Location 540 545 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For EDMSAT Operation Output 2 D Sp 546 551 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For EDMSTU Operation Output 3 Location 552 557 e Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Smoke Reset Operation Output 4 Location 558 563 g Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Output 5 Location 564 569 H Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Screamers RELAY Output 6 Location 570 575 ee E Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Codepad Buzzer The following outputs are available via an optional plug on 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 Output 7 Location 576 581 ech 9 el Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 1 Output 8 FF Location 582 587 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Area 1 Output 9 Location 588 593 Eb WI GB Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 2 Output 10 D Location 594 599 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Stro
244. rtitioned Codepad CP500P codepad will not reset the output You can only reset this output on the area codepad that the zone has been allocated to when the system has been partitioned Day Alarm Enabled Software Version 1 20 This output will operate as soon as day alarm has been enabled The output will reset when day alarm has been turned off Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 for further information day alarm Timed Output This output will operate when the time set in LOCATION 656 659 on page 145 has been reached This output can also be activated using the following methods 1 Remote Codepad Refer to Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for more information 2 Via Touch Tone Telephone Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 and Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for more information 3 Via Alarm Link Software CC816 Refer to the Alarm Link Instruction Manual for more information Pre Alert Warning For Timed Output This output will operate for the duration of the pre alert time set in LOCATION 655 on page 145 AC Fail This output will operate as soon as the AC mains has failed It will reset as soon as the AC mains has restored This output will operate irrespective if Option 4 in LOCATION 668 on page 158 has been enabled or disabled ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 1 D Programmable Outputs 129 Low Battery This out
245. rtitioning 179 Zone Allocations For Area 3 LOCATION 708 715 0000000 Location Description Area 3 Zone 1 Indicator Area 3 Zone 2 Indicator Area 3 Zone 3 Indicator Table 131 Area 3 Zone Allocations Zone Allocations For Area 4 LOCATION 716 723 00000000 Location Description Area 4 Zone 6 Indicator Area 4 Zone 7 Indicator Area 4 Zone 8 Indicator Table 132 Area 4 Zone Allocations i i i i i i i Note Any zone that is common to more than one area will report to the base station receiver on group zero Example Area 1 Zone Allocations Solucion LOCATION 692 699 78900000 EELER Alarm Zones BN TME Om P Figure 7 CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepad In this example zones 7 8 and 9 have been mapped to Area 1 to appear as zones 1 2 and 3 Programming the same zone number into more than one area indicates that the zone will operate as a common zone For example if zone 2 is allocated to Area 1 and Area 3 zone 2 will then become a common zone to both Areas 1 and Area 3 Zone 2 will not trigger unless both Area and Area 3 have been armed Any number of zones can be mapped to any combination of the four areas to act as common zones Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 180 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual User Code Allocations LOCATIONS 724 755 are provided for assigning each user code to an area or multip
246. s Failure This event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver It will reset when the first Kiss Off is received This output event type is not applicable to domestic or voice reporting The codepad buzzer will now operate instead of the output that has been programmed The output is no longer functional and cannot be used for any other output event type Note If you have used all programmable outputs on the control panel and require an additional output program the output event type on any output between 7 14 and redirect the output to the remote codepad buzzer This enables you and your customer to save money on purchasing the additional 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 Safecom Remote Operation Of Outputs Safecom can remotely operate up to 3 outputs on the S o lut io n SC8016 as well as Arm and Disarm from the ST1000 software in the Control Room The S o lu t ion SC8016 needs to be programmed for this function to work Outputs that are to be operated via ST1000 software need to be programmed with the event codes Remote control 2 2 9 Remote control 3 2 10 Remote control 4 2 11 These correspond to the ST1000 output 1 2 and 3 Example If you wanted Output 1 on the ST1000 to control Output 2 on the So lu t ion SC8016 you would need to program LOCATION 546 as a 2 and LOCATION 547 as a 9 Remote control 2 Note You cannot use Remote Control 1 when operati
247. s To 1 Hold the 8 button down until two beeps are heard A ZONE indicator will illuminate If no ZONE indicator illuminates the codepad cannot be used when the system has been partitioned Z1 Area One Codepad Z2 Area Two Codepad Z3 Area Three Codepad ZA Area Four Codepad Z7 CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad 23 Press the AWAY button to exit this mode How To Change The Tone Of The Buzzer 1 To change the tone of the codepad buzzer hold the 8 button down continuously The tone of the buzzer will start to increase in pitch 2 If the codepad is a CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad or a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad two beeps will be heard indicating the area that the codepad belongs to as in above when you determine which area that the codepad belongs to when the system has been partitioned Shortly after hearing the two beeps the tone of the buzzer will start to increase in pitch Ranges from 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 3 Release the 8 button when the desired tone has been reached 4 Press the AWAY button to exit this mode 9 Initiate A Test Report Holding the O button down until two beeps are heard will transmit a Test report that is used to test the dialling and reporting capabilities of the system without causing the sirens to sound A Test report will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 This feature is only applicable if the control panel has a dialler h
248. s armed in the AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 It will reset when the system has been disarmed If the system has been partitioned this event will operate when all areas have been armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 System Disarmed This output will operate when the system is in the disarmed state It will reset as soon as the system becomes armed If the system has been partitioned this event will operate when all areas have been disarmed Armed In STAY Mode This output will operate when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 When the system has been partitioned this event will operate when any area has been armed in STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 Armed In AWAY Mode Software Version 1 20 This output will operate when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode and will reset when the system is next disarmed If the system has been partitioned this event will operate when any area has been armed in the AWAY Mode Pre Arming Alert Time Software Version 1 10 This output will operate during the time period before the control panel will automatically arm in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Once the control panel has automatically armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 the output will reset To program the Pre Arming Alert Time refer to LOCATION 654 on page 144 Pre Arming Alert Time Software Version 1 20 This output will operate during the time period before the control panel will automatically arm in AWAY Mode o
249. s ceseeereeees 27 966 Automatic Stepping Of Locations sssesseeee00 28 999 Software Version Number 28 Instant Ouere geduet Seege 105 Instant Zone Isolate In STAY TI 105 Introduction inscne ieee ieee sees 14 Isolating Zones Code To Isolate Method AAA 41 Enable Code To Isolate AA 159 Standard Method csscscei ssesssosssassevonnesecessensevsveteseese 41 J JP5 Terminal Bioek sscsisiss a sscssseeeectspes ENEE Ee ses 187 K Keyswitch Interface Enable onrat eae e ee ees Ba aa 155 Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Dallmg 168 L Latching Input Arm Disarm Area A 165 Arm Disarm AWAY Modern 163 ISSUE222 DOC Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 165 Latching Outputs iiin a E E E 63 Lockout DIETI AE EAEE 107 e EE 107 LOW Battery eege Eege EE 42 119 Dynamic Battery Test Only On Am 168 M MAINS Indicator esoe es esee er eseese 33 34 173 Master Code 33 iecciesvieseecdestseteaveetecestevscdesveesedeststecdesesesevess 99 Master Code Function Adding Deleting User Codes cee eeeceeeeesseceeeees 51 Arm All Areas At Same Time ccccceeeeeesesrseseseeeeee 50 Date and TIME eein esra eeen e EEEE EERS 58 Disarm All Areas At Same Time cccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 50 Event Memory Recall 55 Program Domestic Phone Numbers sssssseseesseeseeeeeee 54 Program STAY Mode 2 Zones 59 Turn Day Alarm Ou OfT ee eee eeseeeeeeecnneeeeeees 58 Turn Outputs On O
250. s expired after which time the system will arm in the AWAY or STAY Mode 1 Once the control panel has automatically armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 exit time will commence If a valid user code has been entered during the pre alert time the auto arming time as programmed in LOCATION 650 653 will extend by one hour Refer to Output Event Type Pre Arming Alert Time on page 127 if you required an indication via a programmable output during the Pre Alert Timer ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 145 Timed Output Pre Alert Time LOCATION 655 5 Location Description 655 Increments Of 1 Minute 0 15 Minutes Table 91 Auto Operation Pre Alert Timer Locations This location sets the amount of time in minutes 0 15 that will operate an output programmed with the Output Event Type Pre Alert Warning For Timed Output on page 128 to warn you before the timed output will automatically operate Refer to LOCATION 656 659 for programming the output time operation Refer to Output Event Types on page 127 for more information Auto Operation Of The Timed Output LOCATION 656 659 0000 Location Description Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Units Digit Table 92 Auto Operation Of The Timed Output Locations Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit These locations set the time of the day that
251. s has expired If your message is less than 16 seconds long simply release the switch to stop recording For good recording results keep all background noise to a minimum and speak clearly into the microphone approximately 30 cm away WARNING Do not press the Record Play switch without the earpiece connected unless you want to record If you do the current message will be erased and a new message recorded Replay The Voice Message There are two different Replay modes available One is to check the message and the other is used during an alarm condition The first replay mode is to check the message with the crystal earpiece connected By pressing the Record Replay switch once the voice module will replay the message it currently has stored so that it can be checked for accuracy and clarity This mode will automatically terminate as soon as the programmed message has been completely replayed The second replay mode occurs when an alarm condition occurs and the control panel that the voice module is connected to dials the programmed telephone numbers This can be achieved by triggering a zone or by sending a test report Once triggered the control panel will dial the programmed telephone number and commence playing its recorded voice message The message consists of a 90 second period during which time the recorded voice message will be repeated continuously The 90 second timer commences as soon as the last digit of the telephone number has
252. seeceest ves seese99 131 EDMSAT Satellite Siren cccceseseseseseeeeeeeeeees 127 EDMSTU Secure 127 Entry Wammung cece cesceeseecsseceseeecseeseseeeesaeens 128 Entry Warning Day Alarm Resettng 128 Exit Warm enee EAR cts 127 Exit Warning Pntehed A 128 Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Entry Warning EEN 127 Fire Alarm Latching A 130 Fire Alarm Resetting 0 ceec ce eesceeesecseceseeeeeeeens 130 Fire Alarm Verification c cseseseseseeeeseeeseneeees 130 Horn Speaker Bail scsieccclccvsesessinesedtecasntevssnsesderevettess 129 Kiss Off After End Of Exit Time ccccccceeseseeeeee 128 Low Battery mioceen EENEG 129 Mamie Zones cscs satis lata tees tiie nes AE Es 132 Mimic Zone lO ssenari ee edeee Ek 132 Mimic Zone H ee EE eR Seis 132 Mimic Zone HI annenin nnan a e ee 132 Miami Zone 13 egesb e iesen ges bde age een 132 Mimic Zone 14 oo ccssdededesedhcedentdeddetdedgocstudnadedseeesvnes gt 132 Mimic Zone 18 132 Mimic Zone 16 ENEE ENNEN e 132 Mimic Zone 2 nre ere EE e Een E TE Es 132 Mimic Zonge 132 Mimie Zone 4 08 eeh ENEE 132 Mimic Zone S ees REENEN EE Een 132 Mime ZONE E 132 Mimic ZONE T veccccseetencedevesnccsteeendeddecdndtacdbessvndeeedsvntes 132 Mamie eme Een 132 Mimic Zone D es EEN 132 Pre Alert Warning For Timed Output 128 Pre Arming Alert Time 0 eeeceesseceseeeeneeeceteeeeneeee 127 pnt gs See ee Ee 127 Remote Control 1 131 Remote Control 7 131 Remo
253. send its transmission for a period of 2 minutes It will then hang up and commence dialling the next telephone number If the call is acknowledged the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event Note From Software Version 1 32 onwards you can acknowledge the call by pressing the button on your telephone without the DTMF Command Module CC886 connected For Software Version 1 10 1 31 the DTMF Command Module will need to be connected to your control panel to acknowledge Domestic Dialling by pressing the button on your telephone Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 80 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Synthesised Voice Reporting The Voice Module CC888 has been designed so that a clear concise voice message can be transmitted by the control panel to the telephone numbers of your choice when an alarm condition occurs This allows the person receiving your call to easily understand that the alarm at your home or office has been activated and that action is required This voice message is pre recorded and can be changed as many times as necessary The message can be from between 1 16 seconds in length There is no longer a need to put up with having to decipher alarm tones and trying to explain to your relatives just what the tones actually mean Any person can easily interpret the recorded message and then take immediate action according to your specific
254. ser Code 11 Location 144 35 8 35 jas as User Code 14 Location 168 User Code 17 Location 192 seei User Code 20 Location 216 sisisi User Code 23 Location 240 25 35 jas jas User Code 26 Location 264 35 15 35 15 User Code 29 Location 288 35 8 35 35 15 User Code 7 Locati s fes lasses User Code 10 Locati ahs 35 5 User Code 13 Locati 25 15 User Code 16 Locati zllcbls User Code 19 Locati 25 15 35 15 User Code 22 Locati 35 35 35 15 User Code 25 Locatio zllcblz User Code 28 Locatio 35 8 35 jas jas User Code 6 Location 104 SEEERRR User Code 9 Location 128 as fas fes fas fas jas User Code 12 Location 152 ashes 15 15 15 5 User Code 15 Location 176 spss sys User Code 18 Location 200 SEEERRR User Code 21 Location 224 afas fas fas fas 3 User Code 24 Location 248 ashish is fs as User Code 27 Location 272 as fas fas fas fas jis User Code 30 Location 296 User Code 31 Location 304 User Code 32 Location 312 SEEERRR sfs fsfs BERRRE Note User Codes 16 32 report as user 15 except for Contact ID Format O En ak N ae Ke EI EI ei SS EI ERE E A Ww oa fo an wo O A W oe EI El EI LS Lel D e a St a D CH an D N m oI 1 Lel D V Ki CO be EI R Set o LS LS ES EI El EI LS nm CH Ki mi nm E
255. should use options 8 15 Note Zones which trigger for more than 10 seconds continuously will be considered unsealed and cause an alarm condition irrespective of any zone pulse count or zone time settings Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 110 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Day Alarm LOCATION 336 1 Option Day Alarm Zone a o Os zoa Table 52 Day Alarm Zones 1 4 LOCATION 337 0 Option Day Alarm Zone Oa Zone7 SSCS Ps Zones S d Table 53 Day Alarm Zones 5 8 Day alarm enables a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed state Indications are available via any of the programmable outputs including the codepad buzzer This function has been expanded to accommodate latching and non latching day alarm output event types Refer to Output Event Types 0 14 and 0 15 on page 128 for further information on programming an output for monitoring day alarm zones When the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 zones that have been programmed as day alarm zones will activate the sirens and dialler just as non day alarm zones do When day alarm has been activated it will ignore any zone pulse count settings that have been programmed for that zone i e Zone pulse count is only relevant when the system has been armed Day Alarm Resetting An output that is programmed as Day Alarm Resetting will oper
256. sing the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 4 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 3 Area 4 Codepad Data DIP switch 3 on the back of the Area 4 codepad will need to be in the on position DIP Switches R22 LO R19 Area 1 S1 on Ne SL R Area 2 S2 on CE NK Area 3 S1 S2 on SR Area 4 S3 on gt x om Ld Qn YE ES Ee Cle S O OO m ES Oo Lu Ril Riz Blk Red Gen Figure 8 D AREA Codepad DIP Switch Settings Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 16 Safecom Installation Manual 16 Solution Solution 182 itioning Codepad Connections For Part SoaluGion SE 16 MASTER AREA 1 The following locations must be programmed for the OUT 1 LOCATION 540 OUTS LOCATION 552 6 541 6 553 8 2 Solution AREA 2 AREA 3 OUT2 LOCATION 546 OUT4 LOCATION 558 Solution 6 547 6 559 AREA 4 Area Addressable CP500A codepads to f
257. sl User Code 12 ion 152 159 User Code 13 sej fo fs User Code 15 ion 176 183 User Code 16 sjefs jl User Code 18 ion 200 207 User Code 19 zlsblzbizbl 0 User Code 21 i 231 User Code 22 1 ISSUE222 DOC n 224 bb H O N CA N Locat BEGER SEF ER EE CECR 2 oa N oa o oa E E User Code 2 sss fejs s s User Code 5 s fslas Eich User Code 8 Locati SERGE User Code 11 Locati hsls spss User Code 14 Locati t fas fas fas fis User Code 17 Locati spss User Code 20 Locati ssf User Code 23 Location BERERE EI ei 2 fe ja Di N CH m ul OO E a P K m ul Q pe ae e gt e ul pei ze Re N m ul O N oO m ul N Ka Location 072 Location 096 CH Eat Kal L CH GO EE Le a N N N a ER ES Ee Ek Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets User Code 24 User Code 27 Location 248 255 15 15 15 15 15 15 dP Location 272 279 iss User Code 30 fsfs Auxiliary Code 1 Location 296 303 e User Code 25 Location 256 263 15l15l15l15l15l15 15 H User Code 28 Location 280 287 Biss sp sps o User Code 31 Location 304 311 ashshi 0 User Code 26 User Code 29 User Code 32 213 Location 264 271 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 H Location 288 295 spspsPspspsps Location 312 319 Peise H L
258. stallation Manual Zone Allocations Each area can have up to eight zones allocated to it The eight locations for each area represent ZONE indicators one to eight on the remote codepad Any of the zone inputs 1 15 can be mapped to any area to appear as any zone on the remote codepad i e Any zone from 1 15 can be common to as many areas as required Common zones report to the base station receiver on group zero Zones that are specific to one area will report on the corresponding group number Zone 16 is common to all areas and cannot be mapped to an individual area It is ideally suited as a 24 hour burglary or fire zone If zone 16 has been programmed as an instant zone it will become active as soon as any area has been armed When zone 16 has triggered the AUX indicator on a CPS Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will illuminate or if an CP5 Area Addressable CPSO0A codepad has been used zone 16 will be indicated by the FAULT indicator Zone Allocations For Area 1 LOCATION 692 699 0000000 Location Description Area 1 Zone 1 Indicator Area 1 Zone 2 Indicator 692 i 693 i 695 697 698 Table 129 Area 1 Zone Allocations Zone Allocations For Area 2 LOCATION 700 707 00000000 Location Description Area 2 Zone 6 Indicator Area 2 Zone 7 Indicator Area 2 Zone 8 Indicator S Table 130 Area 2 Zone Allocations ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Pa
259. stem is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 2 Date and Time The date and time fault will register every time the control panel has been powered down This fault will clear after the date and time has been programmed Refer to Setting The Date and Time on page 58 for further information on setting the date and time 3 Sensor Watch A sensor watch fault will register because one of the detection devices has stopped working or has failed to detect movement for the programmed time period whilst the control panel is disarmed The fault will clear after the registered zone has been unsealed and resealed again To find out which zone has registered the sensor watch fault enter Fault Analysis Mode and hold down the 5 button to display the zone that has registered the sensor watch fault Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 for setting sensor watch time and Zone Options on page 107 for setting zones for sensor watch ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 43 4 Horn Speaker Monitor A horn speaker fault will register when the horn speaker becomes disconnected from the control panel This fault will clear when the horn speaker is reconnected Refer to LOCATION 665 on page 154 to enable monitoring of the horn speaker 5 Telephone Line Fault A telephone line fault will register if the telephone line has been disconnected from the control panel for more than 40
260. system programming options They can be used for a variety of functions with incredible flexibility All outputs have a common terminal that is positive 12 VDC The outputs are protected by EDM s unique Integrated Protection System IPS This makes them extremely tolerant to abuse or incorrect wiring It should be noted that each output is open collector and will not source any current but can sink a maximum of 400 mA per output The total continuous stand by current on the system should not exceed 500 mA maximum combined external load is 1 Amp with backup battery These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by the 1 amp fuse The total continuous stand by current on the system should not exceed 500 mA maximum combined external load is 1 Amp with backup battery This group of terminals is protected by EDM s solid state IPS system giving them incredible tolerance against short circuits The STRB terminal Output 4 is fully programmable as with outputs 1 2 and 3 This output is factory set as the strobe output and is the connection point for the negative side of a strobe light The positive side of the strobe is connected to the COM terminal This output is normally open circuit going low and is capable of sinking 400 mA The total continuous stand by current on the system should not exceed 500 mA maximum combined external load is 1 Amp with backup battery The SPK terminal is the reflex h
261. t Allowed This feature allows the control panel to remove any zones that are programmed for lockout from the lockout list while the sirens are running This feature allows a monitoring station to receive codes from previously locked out zones during siren time 4 Horn Speaker Monitor If this option has been enabled the control panel will detect when the horn speaker has been disconnected from the speaker terminals The FAULT indicator will illuminate when the horn speaker has been disconnected and will extinguish when the horn speaker has been reconnected If an output is required to operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected refer to Output Event Type Horn Speaker Fail on page 129 for more information 8 Horn Speaker Beeps Allowed No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 105 Horn Speaker Beeps This feature will enable horn speaker beeps to be heard when the system is armed and disarmed via a hand held radio remote control unit Devices connected to the bell output RELAY OUTPUT will not activate These speaker beeps are applicable when using the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 or connecting a switch to the JP5 pins EXP GND If connecting a switch to the JP5 pins enable the required input type in LOCATION 672 on page 163 Note Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 will only sound the three beeps when carried out via a keyswitch interface
262. t Link Cables issii ceiiiec nesk 187 EE er D 34 Pover Upa a aA E 167 Disarming All Areas At Same Time ccececcececeeeeeeeeees 50 60 161 Allow Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm 161 Enable Single Button Arming s sessssessssrreerserrssee 161 Enable Single Button Disarming 0 eee 161 From AWAY Mode 35 Latching Input For Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 163 165 Momentary Input Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 163 164 STAY Model a ous EEN 37 STAY IMOdE 23 ccssscccsssctuscassies ESETE 39 DMTF Command Module EDD enee ee EE EA 162 Domestic Dialling rey erein en enai 27 Acknowled e onsere ne aae e eiai 79 Busy Tone Detection asis N csseeeereecnseeeeeees 168 Disable Via Master Code cee cesceeesseeesseeeseeeeeees 78 Kiss Off Detection anori n 168 Operation isee oe ace EEN ee 79 Program Phone Numbers sssssesesesssessressrrserereeee 54 78 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 223 DTMF Command Module ceesseeeeesececeeesseeeeeeneeees 187 Allow Access Into Programming Mode 162 Allow Access To Installer Code Puncttong 162 Allow Master Code Functions eeeesseeeeeseeeeees 162 Arm Disarm Auxiliary Code Operations 162 Establish Communication Lmk ce eeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeee 22 E 67 Bregtamung roei eea iei ii ENE RS 22 Duress AV ATTN EE EET OTE E ETE EEE 40 IE oO EE 116 E ED Fault ers enee E E A RAS 43 EDMSAT Satellite Siren eee eee eeeeeeceeesneeeeeeeeees 127 EDMSA
263. t available when the system has been partitioned therefore this hold down function does not operate when the system has been partitioned Horn Speaker Test Holding the T button down until two beeps are heard will sound the horn speaker for a two second burst No other sounding device will sound in this mode If An EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will test the horn speaker for a two second burst followed by the strobe connected to the satellite siren Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 62 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual 2 Bell Test Holding the A button down until two beeps are heard will sound the speakers for a two second burst No other sounding device will sound in this mode If an EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will test the horn speaker for a two second burst followed by the strobe connected to the satellite siren 3 Strobe Test Holding the 3 button down will operate the strobe No other device will operate in this mode If an EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will also test the strobe on the satellite siren How To Turn Strobe Test ON 1 Hold down the 3 button until three beeps are heard The strobe will begin to flash How To Turn Strobe Test OFF 1 Hold down the 3 button until two beeps are heard The strobe will stop flashing 4 Turning Day Alarm On
264. t the Installer s Programming Mode by entering the command 9 6 O followed by the AWAY button wait two seconds for the activity LED to return to its normal state and then remove the programming key This programming key will now become your standard data pattern for future programming of your control panels It should be noted that when entering the Installer s Programming Mode inserting a programming key and then altering any location would cause a simultaneous update of not only the programming keys data but also the control panel s data Therefore you are not able to alter data in the programming key without the same location being altered in the control panel s memory Note Connecting a Programming Key CC891 to the control panel when the programming keys memory is blank will corrupt the control panel s memory unless the Installer s Programming Mode has been entered first If this occurs then the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 22 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Programming Via The DTMF Command Module The DTMF Command Module CC886 will allow you to operate and program your control panel remotely via the telephone line Once a communications link has been established with the control panel you will be able to per
265. te Control 3 131 Remote Control 4 131 Ring Beie vistas ieee de testo A IRERE 131 Sensor Wate hiore sees pees seceg ses coed aes cake bee Ee 129 Silent Alanis iess Geteste fut gege ege Sec 130 Sirens RUNNING eee a eoet ek eios 130 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 226 Speaker Beeps ege eege 129 Strobe Operating csr ee eE EEE 130 System Armed meriin a a 127 System Disammed eee cee essecesseeesseeesseeeeeees 127 Telephone Line Faute 131 Timed pt svessssssncissestoovaedneesosnesessshsosssioncosen ses 128 ZONE NOt Sealed cciseddsevosseesccsndesevevnosscoenstyedessettleses 132 Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time 132 Outputs Automatic Operations Tme cece eee ceeeeeees 145 Detaulte steet 125 Eyent Ty E 127 One Shot Polarity asien e Geesen 137 Polart eatae oaeee ne 134 te Ger Ee ee Ee 145 Pulsi Polarities 1 3 s0sssccseccceovsesieesbetedessetvnstessecoseases 136 Redirecting To Codepad Buzzer sssesssesesseeseeeeeee 126 hu 136 Toggle On Off Via Master Code 37 P Rome Slam esoguer ee Reeg 40 LEN Sareea e EEN 155 Panic REPOM 3 52 i555 Ces EsteeeE NEE EE sees EN 117 PARTIAL Indicato ieser eeen 173 Parton Se a ee ea aE R a 172 Allow Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas 157 158 Area 1 Codepad As Main Codepad ce eee 181 Area 1 Codepad Setup 181 Area 2 Codepad Setup 181 Area 3 Codepad Setup 181 Area 4 Codepad Setup 181 Area Addressable Codepad Operations
266. ted Index 222 2 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface 0 0 189 24 Hour Fire Zone 106 24 Hour Zonge seve eee NEUENS comes 106 A AG EE 43 118 Tn Ile hint ene ee 156 In Z Mint Sis ies ssc ssieesncneden dadtesebeeceetecane seven sehsouneties 156 AC Mains TONLE ees eege eene ege 158 Access Denied arren i e ene 118 155 Acknowledge Tone Extend Detection From 30 To 60 Seconds 168 All aria LINK Ae ernn taren a EaR E E i 69 152 Modem Module Reoured ce eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 156 Terminate On Alarm ooo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneenseenee 152 Alarm Link Software 20 0 ceeeeeesscesecesecnseenseeaee 187 Alarm Memory Reset On Disam 161 Answering Machine Bvpass 96 175 Only When Armed 00 0 cece cece erseeeeeees 153 175 APPeNdices hiie r e ei a yir 205 Area 1 Codepad Connected To Data Terminal 156 Area Display Indicators eeeceesseceereeesseceereeeneeeeeee 172 Area On Off Indicators 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseeeees 172 Arming All Areas At Same Tmme 50 60 161 Auto Arm In AWAY Mode 157 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 157 158 Automati Se E DE ENEE 144 AWAY Mode deed ENNER Ee 35 61 Enable Single Button Arming eee eeeeeeeeee 161 Latching Input For Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 163 165 Momentary Input Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 163 164 Pre Alert Automatic Arm 144 STAY Mode Tatepi seee n n a as 36 STAY M d Zoa ieee eoori e EEEE EES 38 Via Telephone menguy a a a 66 ASCH Characters sesini
267. ted this code will be used as the expansion code and the user number that armed or disarmed the system will follow in the same transmission Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 153 for enabling Open Close reports in STAY Mode To enable Open Close reports only after a previous alarm refer to LOCATION 664 on page 153 Note If you do not require Open Close reports program LOCATION 504 505 with zero ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 121 Safecom RF Fail LOCATION 760 763 3531 Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Point ID 48 Decimal 762 Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats V2 00 An RF Fail report Contact ID Event Code 353 will be transmitted to the base station when the safecom unit misses a poll or fails contact with the base station Receiver A restore signal will be transmitted when radio communication is restored Safecom Telco Fail LOCATION 764 767 3511 Location Description 765 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or TS Kam Or bapen Dizi a b2 omat 766 Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Ganne Location Fors Or tomais 767 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Lee Point ID 49 Decimal V2 00 Telco Fail report Contact ID
268. tem is in the armed state Program LOCATION 506 513 on page 122 with Option 1 Send test reports only if the system is armed and then set the test report time to be in the middle of the day During Monday to Friday when the premises are generally open and the system disarmed a test report will not be transmitted However on the weekend the premises will be closed and the system armed so a test report will be transmitted at the programmed time thus verifying the operation of the dialler At first glance this may not seem to be a big deal but lets do a few sums and you will see just where savings can be made Let us assume that the customer wants needs or has test reports programmed for once a day as well as opening and closing reports This means that at least three phone calls will be made each week day and one call on Saturday and one call on Sunday By using the Solut ion 16 control panel you will be able to eliminate five calls per week This means that over one week you will save your customer 1 20 and over one year you will save them 62 40 Not a bad saving and remember these figures are for local calls only Turning the table slightly a control room with lets say 1000 customers sending the above mentioned reports can expect to receive some 884 000 phone calls 212 160 assuming local calls just for reporting opening closing and test reports over a 12 month period If you use the So lut ion 16 control panel you can effecti
269. th the EOL resistor The function of the zones and their response times are programmable via the system programming options These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by the 1 amp fuse The total continuous stand by current on the system should not exceed 500 mA maximum combined external load is 1 Amp with backup battery These terminals are zones five to eight and their common terminal is 12V All normally closed contacts are to be connected in series with the EOL resistor where all normally open contacts are to be connected in parallel with the EOL resistor The function of the zones and their response times are programmable via the system programming options These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by the 1 amp fuse The total continuous stand by current on the system should not exceed 500 mA maximum combined external load is 1 Amp with backup battery Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 196 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Solution 16 Wiring Diagram 605 Plug 1 Green Internal Phone Line 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line 2 Black Telecom Line Street 6 Red Telecom Line Street DI E Se Ww E O T A 3 amp 4 Not Used Power To External Equipment 12V 1 Amp Detector Power To External Equipment 12V 1 Amp Detector Detector LINK BETWEEN 1
270. the Basic Pager s access telephone number programmed 2 LOCATION 049 requires Option 5 Pager Handshake to be programmed 3 LOCATION 050 requires Option 12 Basic Pager Reporting to be programmed Subscriber ID Zone Status System Status Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 678 01200000 9000 Zone Normal 0 Alarm 1 Zone Bypassed 2 Zone Trouble 3 Disarmed 8 Armed 9 Normal 0 Panic Duress 1 Fire Alarm 2 Medical Alarm 3 AC Normal 0 AC Failure 1 System Normal 0 System Fault 1 Figure 3 Basic Pager Display The example in Figure 3 Basic Pager Display shows that the transmission has come from Subscriber ID Number 678 and that Zone 2 is in alarm Zone 3 has been manually isolated the system is armed the panic zone is normal the AC is connected and there is no fault condition Note Basic Pager Format Only Supports Zones 1 8 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 85 PET Alpha Pager Reporting The Solut ion 16 control panel is capable of transmitting PET Alpha characters at the rate of 300 baud to a pocket pager using the PET Protocol Page Entry Terminal Using this method of reporting will allow people who are on the move to monitor burglary alarms medical alarms refrigeration alarms and virtually any other event that can be used to trigger the So lut ion 16 control panel Programming and Hardware Requirements To use PET Alph
271. the need to know a Master Code To enter the required installer code function enter the sTaLLer cove followed by the required RE digit and the AWAY button INSTALLER cope FUNCTION AWAY These functions can only be carried out when the system is in the disarmed state Function Description Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report 2 BEE Satellite Siren Service Mode EDMSAT Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On and Off Table 14 Installer Code Functions 2 Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report If test reports are required LOCATION 506 513 on page 122 will need to be programmed After this has been carried out test reports need to be initiated by setting the first test report If the first test report is not set the test report will be transmitted in the number of days as programmed in the repeat interval programmed in LOCATION 506 513 Note Each time Installer s Programming Mode has been entered you will need to reset the number of days until the first test report Otherwise the next test report will report as programmed in the repeat interval time How To Set The First Test Report 1 Enter the INSTALLER CODE followed by 2 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the Ne OF DAYS to wait 1 99 until the first test report 3 Press the AWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and A
272. this option is not enabled the MAINS indicator will begin to flash and an AC Loss signal will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains power has been disconnected continuously for 2 minutes The MAINS indicator will cease to flash once the AC mains has been restored for more than two minutes 8 Zone Pulse Count Handover Allowed If this option has been enabled any zone pulse count readings will handover and accumulate to any zone that is triggered during the same arming cycle Zone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count options 8 15 Refer to Zone Pulse Count on page 108 and Zone Pulse Count Time on page 109 for more information Note From Software Version 1 37 onwards 24 hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones 24 hour zones can handover pulses to other zones ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 157 System Options 4 LOCATION 668 Software Version 1 10 Only 0 Description Delay Audible Alarm Until Communication Complete Reset Alarm Outputs From Any Area Partitioned Systems Only Auto Arm In AWAY Mode Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 Table 108 System Options 4 Software Version 1 10 Only 1 Delay Audible Alarm Until Communication Complete If this option has been enabled the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will not activate until the base station receiver has sent a Kiss Off back to the control pane
273. tion 396 403 eee Leelee eelo Zone 9 Location 404 411 Zone 10 Location 412 419 Zone 11 Location 420 427 oe fejo eee elele fef ioi Zone 12 Location 428 435 Zone 13 Location 436 443 Zone 14 Location 444 451 oefe eeel elele fef ioi N one 15 Location 452 459 Zone 16 Location 460 467 aa ee EE ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming 105 Zone Types There are sixteen different zone types to choose from Each zone has the ability to be programmed as any one of the types listed below Zone Type Description Zone Type Description 24 Hour Fire Chime Only Zone Not Used ie o Handover Isolated In STAY Mode 1 Table 48 Zone Types 0 Instant Zone An Instant zone will sound the sirens and operate the dialler as soon as it registers as unsealed after the exit time has expired 1 Handover Zone A Handover zone will act as an instant zone if it has been triggered by itself If a handover zone is triggered after a delay zone the remaining delay time will handover from the delay zone to the handover zone Handover may be sequential or random Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 666 on page 155 if you require handover to be sequential or non sequential 2 Delay 1 Zone A Delay 1 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Time 1 on page 140 3 Delay 2 Zone A Delay 2 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Time 2 on page 140
274. to have a separate area codepad only for Area 1 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 0 Area 1 Codepad Data DIP switch 1 on the back of the Area 1 codepad will need to be in the on position Setting Up An Area 2 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 2 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 2 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 1 Area 2 Codepad Data DIP switch 2 on the back of the Area 2 codepad will need to be in the on position Setting Up An Area 3 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 3 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 3 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 2 Area 3 Codepad Data DIP switch 1 and 2 on the back of the Area 3 codepad will need to be in the on position Setting Up An Area 4 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 4 when u
275. to program this information then please contact your nearest Detection Systems office for assistance Once programmed proceed with mounting the Radio in the metal cabinet by placing the double sided tape on the base of the Maxon Radio as in Figure 25 Then connect the coax cable to the metal cabinet as in figure 24 then attach the male BNC to the Maxon Radio Finally connect the wiring harness to the Radio and the SAFECOM So lut ion 16 interface Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 204 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Telecom Connection Diagrams TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUSTRALIA 605 PLUG 611 SOCKET Internal Phones TOP VIEW RED Control BRT O Panel GREEN I YELLOW 4P4C PLUG 1 Green Internal Phone Line 2 Black Telecom Line Street 3 Not Connected 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line 6 Red Telecom Line Street 4 Not Connected Telecom Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUSTRALIA 605 PLUG 611 SOCKET Internal Phones TOP VIEW Reo oun o O BLACK i GREEN ee 6P4C PLUG re 1 Green Internal Phone Line 2 Black Telecom Line Street 3 Not Connected 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line 6 Red Telecom Line Street 4 Not Connected Telecom Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR NEW ZEALAND Internal Phones BLACK TOP VIEW IN em IN RED CONTROL L i PANEL OUT g ELLOW l our
276. ton will also terminate the session at anytime One long beep indicates the code entered already exists an incorrect user number was selected or the area allocation of the user code is incorrect if the system has been partitioned Auxiliary Codes Auxiliary Codes 1 and 2 are treated as user codes 33 and 34 To add or change either of these two codes refer to How To Add Or Change A User Code on page 51 To delete either of these two codes refer to How To Delete A User Code on page 52 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 53 System Functions Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS FAULT Indicator Indicator Indicator Zone 1 User Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator No SPS PPS SWISS Ps s N K N N N elei lcileolstiwivwit elenieiealcileoist Iw It lIo N SIS Ts Ss Ss bei Table 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 54 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual 2 Programming Domestic Phone Numbers This option allows a Master Code holder to view and program the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the event of an alarm For a more detailed description refer to Domestic Reporting on
277. tput event type Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time This output will operate at the end of exit time if a burglary zone is unsealed The output will reset when all zones are sealed or the system has been disarmed Chime zones will not operate this output event type Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed 4 K Area 3 Has Zone Unsealed Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed 4 13 Area 4 Has Zone Unsealed These outputs will operate when a zone in their corresponding area has registered as unsealed in either the armed or disarmed state The output will reset once the zone has resealed Example Zone is allocated to Area 1 If Zone 1 becomes unsealed Output Event Type 4 10 will activate The output will reset once the zone has resealed AC Mains 60 Hz Or 50 Hz This output will activate when the AC mains has a frequency of 60 Hz The output will reset once the AC mains has returned to 50 Hz Area 1 In Alarm 5 A Area 3 In Alarm Area 2 In Alarm 5 5 Area 4 In Alarm These outputs will operate when a zone in their corresponding area has triggered an alarm These outputs will reset once a valid user code has been entered Example Zone 1 has been allocated to Area 1 If zone 1 has triggered into alarm Output Event Type 5 2 will activate The output will reset once a valid user code allocated to Area 1 has been entered ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 5 6 B37 5 4 OO OH RI e Programmable Outputs 133 Areal Is Arm
278. ty levels 4 6 and 12 have been enabled to any of the available 32 user codes the method of Standard Isolating will no longer operate Only those user codes with the priority level of 4 6 and 12 will be able to isolate zones using the method Code To Isolate Priority Level Description 0 Arming amp Disarming O OOOO O a Arming amp Disarming Code Required To Isolate 6 Patrotman Code Code Required To Isolate 8 Master Code Functions SSCS 12 Master Code Functions Code Required To Isolate Figure 4 Priority Levels Arming amp Disarming This priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system Arming Only This priority level allows the user code holder to arm the system but not disarm it Patrolman Code A Patrolman Code will allow you to issue a code that will only disarm the system after an alarm has occurred This will prevent unauthorised use of the code A Patrolman Code can always arm the system This code is designed to work in conjunction with Open Close reports to gain maximum benefit Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 153 to enable Open Close Reports To Be Transmitted Only After An Alarm Has Occurred Arming Disarming Allowed Code To Isolate This priority level allows arming and disarming of the control panel Isolating of zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for furthe
279. ues enabling you to use one EOL resistor value for zones 1 8 and another EOL resistor value for zones 9 16 The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 can only be used with a fixed 3K3 EOL resistor value This means that zones 1 8 can have any EOL resistor value from the available options in LOCATION 339 on page 112 and only 3K3 EOL resistors for zones 9 16 2 Eight Channel Output Board Fitted The Eight Channel Output Board CC884 allows the total number of programmable outputs to total 14 The eight channel output board provides terminals for programmable outputs 7 14 Note A plug in Termination Board CC882 is available for the following keyswitch input options 4 Momentary Input For Arm and Disarm A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 has been enabled the horn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY Mode 8 Latching Input For Arm and Disarm A toggle or latching keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 has bee
280. ufacturing Pty Limited 4 10 11 12 Option Bits 165 Latching Input For Arm and Disarm A toggle or latching keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 154 has been enabled the horn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY Mode Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm in the AWAY Mode Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm the system in the STAY Mode 1 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned this option will not operate Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 2 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm the system in the STAY Mode 2 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned this option will not operate Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Disarm Only A momentary keyswitch may be used to disarm the system from AWAY Mod
281. umer Optrons E 159 CONSUMER Options lhc ccse 35 descecosens desc epeei e kee eE pE EENE a RE EERE RE essee oa Ee ie Sei pE Seseo EE SOEN 160 WEE EE 161 DTMF Command Module Options 00 0 0 cece ces csecseecseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeecesecsecsaecsaecsaecaaecaeecaeseseseaesesesseesseesseeseeaeesaeeenes 162 Expansion Board Py pe eens ores E E cape seteessnse EES EES SES AEN 163 Expansion Board Ty pe see ger E sob loves beggen See See Eege 164 Telephone Line Fault Options sotiin oinn eieiei eiee e cates K EEEE he eoa eoe e suds CEEE EEOSE Ka iotapnessbunbesteds 166 Safecom Reporting Options a a E a r E a E Eee En ERSS 167 KREE DEE 167 SYSTEM O PHONG O gege ge eege d e See diese iesch E TEE E E 168 Carrier SN Options eebe 169 PARTITIONING Ee EE EE 172 Master Partitioned Codepad Indicatorg ee eeceecesecssecssecssecseecseeeneeeeeeeeeeseessecesecssecsaecsaecsaecaecsaecsaecaeeeseseaeseaeeaeees 172 1 Lome Indicators E 172 2 Areas On Off e 172 3 Area Display Indicators eebe SEENEN ENEE 172 A Status Indicators issen a aE E EE E RO R AET eee eh teases eee anges ee 172 Operating Codepads In Partitioning 2s 5cc6 accssspesveseuscasesseecevtstay E r EREE ES Es EN ESEE E E EEI EE E EErEE EEr Esas 173 Operating From A CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepnad A 173 Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad esseseeseessseeseseesssreerssrsresesreerrsreereserereeresreresee 173 Securitel and Partitioning nsin Dee Ee E
282. uminate when the control panel has seized the telephone line to transmit a report The AUX indicator will extinguish once the telephone line has been released Note If the control panel has been partitioned and zone 16 has been used the AUX indicator will also be used to indicate when zone 16 has triggered into alarm 8 Codepad Extinguish Mode Allowed If this option has been enabled all indicators on the remote codepads will extinguish if a button is not pressed for 60 seconds The indicators will illuminate when there is an alarm except a silent alarm when a button is pressed on the codepad when the AC mains fail beeps or if the Entry Time has been activated ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 161 Consumer Options 2 LOCATION 670 2 Description User Code 0 AWAY Function To Arm Disarm All Areas Allowed Single Button Arming Allowed AWAY STAY Mode 1 amp STAY Mode 2 Single Button Disarming From STAY Mode 1 amp STAY Mode 2 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm Table 113 Consumer Options 2 1 User Code 0 AWA Function To Am Disarm All Areas Allowed If this option has been selected it will allow the user code holder to arm disarm all areas at the same time without the need to enter the user code at each area codepad Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 and User Code Function on page 60 for more information If the user arms all areas at the same time and
283. unction correctly 1 3 Figure 9 Connections For CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad and CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepads Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 183 Partitioning el 1G Solucion AREA 1 AREA 2 AREA 3 AREA 4 The following locations must be programmed for the Area Addressable CP500A codepads to function correctly LOCATION 667 Enable Option 1 Main Codepad To Display Data For Area 1 OUT1 LOCATION 540 6 541 1 OUT2 LOCATION 546 6 547 2 OUT3 LOCATION 552 6 553 3 Figure 10 Connections For CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepads ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 184 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 186 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Optional Equipment EDM manufactures numerous accessories that can be used in conjunction with the Solution 16 control panel These optional pieces of equipment will enhance certain features thus making the system extremely flexible EDM SAT Satellite Siren SS914 The EDMSAT Satellite Siren is a totally self contained unit incorporating a high powered siren and a weatherproof strobe A 1 2 AH sealed lead acid battery
284. ut means one activation per arming cycle i e A zone programmed for Lockout can only cause the sirens or dialler to operate once When the system is next armed the zone can cause the sirens and dialler to operate once more As can be seen by Table 49 Zone Options the sirens can be locked out but still leave the dialler to transmit all reports to the base station receiver by programming Zone Option 1 Programming Zone Option 2 will lockout the dialler but leave the sirens to be reset Programming Zone Option 3 i e 1 2 3 will lockout both the sirens and dialler Restore signals will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed The Solut ion 16 control panel performs lockout different to most other control panels in that only the first zone to trigger an alarm condition will be locked out All other zones that are triggered during the same siren run time will reset when the sirens reset This prevents an intruder from triggering all zones then waiting for the sirens to stop before re entering the premises Example All zones are programmed for both lockout siren and dialler Zone 1 is triggered followed by all other zones causing the sirens to sound and the dialler to report to the base station receiver Zone 1 will be the only zone that stops reporting to the base station receiver because of the first zone to trigger is locked out The remaining zones will continue to report if they are triggered again Software Version 1 10
285. vely cut the calls to 624 000 per year at a value of 149 760 assuming local calls a saving of 62 400 If we now assume that for each call one line is printed on the logging printer and that one page is filled per 60 calls You will be able to save 4333 sheets of paper per year and at approximately 45 per box this becomes a considerable saving As you can see using the Solut ion 16 control panel will save you money your customer money and will help conserve our natural resources in fact the only people who don t like this feature is Telecom Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE222 DOC 208 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Specifications 210 Solut ion 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Warranty Statement Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of manufacture as indicated by the date stamp and or the serial number on the product Defective units returned by the purchaser at their own expense during this period will be repaired or replaced at the option of the manufacturer The repair or replacement will be free of charge provided that the defects were not incurred during shipping or handling or the damage was not due to causes beyond the control of Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limit
286. when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 24 Hour Burglary Zone 24 Hour Burglary zone is always ready to trigger the horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state 24 Hour Fire Zone A 24 Hour Fire zone is always ready to trigger the horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state A distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition This fire sound is completely different to the burglary sound Chime Zone Follow Me A Chime zone is not a burglary zone It can never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler Its purpose is to map it to a programmable output for an indication of sealed or unsealed Refer to Output Event Type 4 5 on page 132 Chime zones require EOL resistors and they will register at a remote codepad These zones do not effect the operation of forced arming Zone Not Used If a zone is not used program it as a zone type of 15 This zone will never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler An EOL resistor is not required if this zone type is used ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming 107 Zone Options Option Description Lockout Dialler 4 Silent Alarm 8 Sensor i O Table 49 Zone Options 1 amp 2 Lockout Siren amp Lockout Dialler Locko
287. will be transmitted when the AC mains has been reconnected for two minutes If you wish to ignore AC fail enable Option 4 in LOCATION 668 on page 158 Note If an AC Loss report is not required program the dialler channel in LOCATION 491 with a zero ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 119 Low Battery LOCATION 492 495 3091 Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 493 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 63 Low Battery Locations A Battery Test Failure report Contact ID Event Code 309 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the systems battery voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when a dynamic battery test detects a low capacity battery The control panel continually monitors the battery voltage Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42 A dynamic battery test is performed every time the system or an area has been armed as well as every four hours from power up of the control panel A Low Battery Restore signal will be transmitted if the back up battery has been restored the next time the system is armed or when the dynamic battery test reports the battery test is OK Note If a Battery Test Failure report is not required program the dialler channel
288. y the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return back to normal operation Refer to Installers Programming Commands on page 23 for further information on commands that can be performed during access of the Installer s Programming Mode Note When using the hand held programmer any reference in this manual made to the STAY button should be AWAY considered as the button and the button considered as the button ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 21 Programming Using The Programming Key The Programming Key CC891 is a unique device that will allow you to easily program your control panel Inserting the programming key will automatically initiate a data transfer from the programming key to the control panel memory If you have a new programming key you should first enter the Installer s Programming Mode configure your control panel as per your requirements before inserting the programming key To connect the programming key locate the connections marked PROGRAMMING KEY This point can be found on the right hand side of the control panel Observe the triangular markings on the printed circuit board and line them up with the markings on the programming key To copy the control panel s data into your new programming key enter command 9 6 2 followed by the LAWAY button Refer to Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key on page 25 for further details Exi
289. y time the system is armed the counter pauses calculating Sensor watch will continue calculating the next time the system has been disarmed Example If the Sensor Watch Time is programmed for two days in a situation where a premises is armed for twelve hours and disarmed for twelve hours each day it will take four days before a zone can register as a faulty sensor watch zone Zone Pulse Count Zone pulse count is the number of times a zone must be triggered before the zone registers as an alarm The number of pulses vary between 0 15 The zone pulse count value is relative to a time frame i e The number of pulses must be present during a particular time frame Refer to Table 51 Zone Pulse Count Times on page 109 for time frame settings Option Number Of Pulses Option Number Of Pulses None O8 T 8 ef Table 50 Number Of Pulses Zone pulse count does not effect the LED indicators on a codepad The triggering of a zone will always illuminate the respective indicator but an alarm condition will not occur until the total number of pulses has been reached A zone programmed as a day alarm zone is not effected by any pulse count setting i e Pulse count is only relevant when the system is in the armed state Note A pulse count of zero disables both the zone pulse count and zone pulse count time The zone will cause an alarm as soon as it becomes unsealed The loop response time in this instance defaults to 150 ms ISSUE222
290. ybrid fitted and enabled in LOCATION 663 on page 152 Note Test reports will only be sent via the safecom network if there is no alternate route V2 02 ISSUE222 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Operations 66 Solution 16 Solut ion 16 Safecom Installation Manual Remote Operations This section covers all aspects of operating and programming the So lut ion 16 control panel other than by a remote codepad or the hand held programmer There are a number of methods that can be used via the telephone line to gain access to the control panel These methods will prove to be time saving and easy to perform Remote Arming Via The Telephone This feature allows you to arm your system from any remote location via the telephone line For obvious security reasons the control panel cannot be disarmed using this method To make use of this feature you will require the Phone Controller CC911 How To Remotely Arm Your System Via The Telephone 1 Call the telephone number that your control panel has been connected to 2 When the control panel answers the incoming call a short jingle will be heard Hold the phone controller to the mouthpiece of the telephone and press the button on the side of the unit for 3 seconds 3 After releasing the button on the phone controller two beeps will be heard to indicate that the system has armed in the AWAY Mode If the control panel has been partitioned ALL areas will arm in AWAY

Solution-16/ Solution-16 Safecom Installation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents